Sony PXW-X400, KC, KF Solid-State Memory Camcorder Operating Instructions
Below you will find brief information for Solid-State Memory Camcorder PXW-X400, Solid-State Memory Camcorder PXW-X400KC. The PXW-X400 series is a professional camcorder designed for broadcast and professional video production. It features a 1/2-type 3CMOS sensor and records in XAVC Intra and XAVC Long formats. The camcorder also supports a variety of professional features, including slow and quick motion recording, zebra pattern display, and dual recording (recording to two SxS memory cards simultaneously). The camcorder also offers a variety of connectivity options, including HDMI, SDI, and USB. The camcorder can be used to capture high-quality video for a variety of applications, including newsgathering, documentaries, and corporate videos.
Advertisement
Advertisement
4-587-873-12 (1)
GB
Solid-State Memory Camcorder
Operating Instructions
PXW-X400 / PXW-X400KC / PXW-X400KF
© 2015 Sony Corporation
0002
Table of Contents
1. Overview
Name and Function of Parts ..............................................3
Screen Display ..................................................................12
2. Preparation
Preparing a Power Supply ...............................................21
Attaching a Viewfinder ....................................................22
Using the Camcorder for the First Time...........................24
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens ...................................25
Preparing the Audio Input System ..................................27
Attaching and Adjusting Peripheral Devices ...................28
Handling SxS Memory Cards ...........................................29
Handling SD Cards for Saving Configuration Data ..........31
Using a Media Adaptor ....................................................32
3. Settings and Adjustments
Format Settings ................................................................33
Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance ............36
Setting the Electronic Shutter ..........................................38
Setting Auto Iris ...............................................................39
Adjusting the Focus .........................................................41
Adjusting the Audio Level ...............................................42
Setting Time Data ............................................................44
4. Shooting
Basic Operations ...............................................................46
Advanced Operations .......................................................48
Proxy Data ........................................................................52
Planning Metadata ..........................................................54
Obtaining Location Information (GPS) ............................56
5. Network Configuration
Network Functions Supported by the Camcorder...........57
Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN .........................58
Connecting to the Internet ..............................................61
Transferring Files ..............................................................64
Transmitting Streaming Video and Audio ......................66
Streaming High Quality Video .........................................67
Using Wi-Fi Remote Control ............................................68
Configuring from the Web Menu ....................................70
Supported Network Functions and Operating
Limitations ...............................................................74
6. Clip Operations
Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen.......................75
7. Menu Display and Settings
Setup Menu Organization ................................................81
Basic Setup Menu Operations ..........................................83
Editing the User Menu .....................................................85
Menu List ..........................................................................87
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches ................110
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
User Configuration Data .................................................113
User Files ........................................................................114
ALL Files .........................................................................115
Scene Files ......................................................................116
Reference Files ...............................................................117
Lens Files ........................................................................118
Gamma Files...................................................................119
9. Connecting External Devices
Connecting a Remote Control Unit ................................120
Connecting an External Monitor ....................................122
Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer ....................123
Configuring a Shooting and Recording System ............124
Recording External Input Signals...................................126
10. Maintenance and Inspection
Maintenance ..................................................................127
Error/Warning System ...................................................128
11. Appendix
Usage Precautions ..........................................................131
Specifications .................................................................133
0003
1. Overview
Name and Function of Parts
Power Supply
6
5.
Battery attachment shoe
Attach a BP-L80S/FLX75 Battery Pack. Alternatively, you can attach an AC-DN2B/DN10 AC Adaptor to operate the camcorder from an AC power supply.
“Preparing a Power Supply” (page 21)
“Attaching a Wireless Receiver” (page 27)
[Note]
For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the BP-L80S Battery
Pack.
6.
Camera adaptor connector
Enables connection of a CA-TX70/FB70 HD Camera
Adaptor. To connect an adaptor, remove the cover.
1 2
1.
LIGHT (video light) switch
Determines how a video light connected to the
LIGHT connector (page 4) is turned on and off.
AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video light is in the on position, the video light is turned on automatically while the camcorder is recording.
MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off manually, using its own switch.
[Note]
When the camcorder is set for recording in Picture Cache mode, it is not possible to turn on the light before operation to start recording is carried out (or while data is being stored in memory).
3 4 5
2.
POWER switch
Turns the main power supply on () and off ().
3.
DC IN (DC power input) connector (XLR type,
4-pin, male)
4.
DC OUT 12V (DC power output) connector
(4-pin, female)
Supplies power for an optional WRR-
855S/860C/861/862 UHF Synthesizer Diversity
Tuner or HDVF-L750 Viewfinder (maximum 1.8 A).
[Note]
Do not connect any equipment other than the UHF synthesized diversity tuner.
000
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
Accessory Attachments
9
10
11
1 2
12 13
1.
Wireless receiver insertion slot
2.
Shoulder strap fitting (page 28)
3.
4.
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning lever
5.
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
6.
Viewfinder attachment shoe (page 22)
3 4 5
6
7
8
14 15 16 17 18 19
7.
VF (viewfinder) connectors (26-pin, rectangular and 20-pin, round)
The analog interface connector (20-pin) is for connection of an HDVF series viewfinder, and the digital interface connector (26-pin) is for connection of a CBK-VF02 HD viewfinder.
Use a connection cable to connect your viewfinder to the corresponding connector.
[Note]
Do not connect viewfinders to both connectors at the same time.
8.
Lens mount securing rubber
After locking the lens in position using the lens locking lever, fit this rubber over the lower of the two projections. This fixes the lens mount, preventing it from coming loose.
9.
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob
10.
Attachment for optional microphone holder
11.
LIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin, female)
12.
13.
Lens cable clamp
Clamps the lens cable.
14.
MIC IN (microphone input) (+48 V) connector
(XLR type, 5-pin, female)
Connect a stereo microphone to this connector.
The power (+48 V) is supplied via this connector.
15.
LENS connector (12-pin) (page 25)
[Note]
When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable to this connector, power off the camcorder first.
16.
Tripod mount
When using the camcorder on a tripod, attach the tripod adaptor (optional).
17.
Lens mount (special bayonet mount)
18.
19.
Lens mount cap
Remove by pushing the lens locking lever up.
When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for protection from dust.
Controls Near the Lens
1
3
4
5
2
6
1.
REC START (recording start) button
Press to start recording. Press it again to stop recording. The operation is the same as that of the
VTR button on the lens.
2.
SHUTTER switch
Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Push to
SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter mode setting. When this switch is operated, the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds.
“Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 38)
000
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
[Note]
If Flash Band Reduce is on, setting the SHUTTER switch to ON turns off the Flash Band Reduce function and the
FBR indicator disappears from the viewfinder screen.
Subsequently, setting the SHUTTER switch to OFF turns on the Flash Band Reduce function and the FBR indicator reappears on the viewfinder screen.
3.
FILTER knob
Switches between four ND filters built into this camcorder.
When this selector is used, the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds.
1
2
FILTER knob setting
3
4
ND filter
CLEAR
1/4 ND (attenuates light to approximately 1/4)
1/16 ND (attenuates light to approximately 1/16)
1/64 ND (attenuates light to approximately 1/64)
You can change a Maintenance menu setting so that different white balance settings can be stored for different FILTER knob positions. This allows you to automatically obtain optimum white balance for the current shooting conditions in linkage with the filter selection.
“Adjusting the White Balance” (page 36)
4.
5.
AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/black balance adjustment) switch
Activates the automatic white/black balance adjustment functions.
WHITE: Adjust the white balance automatically.
If the WHITE BAL switch (page 6) is set
to A or B, the white balance setting is stored in the corresponding memory. If the WHITE
BAL switch is set to PRST, the automatic white balance adjustment function does not operate.
BLACK: Adjust the black set and black balance automatically.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even when the ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) function is operating.
If you push the switch to the WHITE side once more during the automatic white balance adjustment, the adjustment is canceled and the white balance setting returns to the original setting.
If you push the switch to the BLACK side once more during the automatic black balance adjustment, the adjustment is canceled and the black balance setting returns to the original setting.
6.
MIC (microphone) LEVEL knob (page 42)
LCD Monitor Side (1)
1 2 3 4
10 12
6 7 8 9
11 12
5
13
14
000
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
1.
ASSIGN. (assignable) 1/2/3 switches
You can assign a function using Operation
>Assignable Switch in the setup menu
The ASSIGN. 1/3 switches are provided with an indicator to show whether a function is assigned to the switch (ON) or not (OFF).
2.
ONLINE button
When network client mode or the streaming function is assigned to this button, press and hold until the indicator is lit orange. Then, press the button again, turning the indicator blue, to enable network client mode or the streaming function.
To exit the enabled function, press and hold the button until the indicator turns off.
The button can also be used as an assignable switch when assigned with functions other than
3.
ALARM (alarm tone volume adjustment) knob
Controls the volume of the warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker or optional earphones. When the knob is turned to the minimum position, no sound can be heard.
However, if Maintenance >Audio >Min Alarm
Volume in the setup menu is set to [Set], the alarm tone is audible even when this volume control is at the minimum position.
ALARM
Minimum Maximum
4.
MONITOR (monitor volume adjustment) knob
Controls the volume of the sound other than the warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker or earphones. When the knob is turned to the minimum position, no sound can be heard.
5.
MONITOR (audio monitor selection) switches
By means of combinations of the two switches, you can select audio that you want to hear through the built-in speaker or earphones.
When the lower switch is set to CH-1/2
Upper switch
CH-1/CH-3
MIX
CH-2/CH-4
Audio output
Channel 1 audio
Channels 1 and 2 mixed audio
(stereo)
a)
Channel 2 audio
When the lower switch is set to CH-3/4
Upper switch
CH-1/CH-3
MIX
CH-2/CH-4
Audio output
Channel 3 audio
Channels 3 and 4 mixed audio
(stereo)
a)
Channel 4 audio a) By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE jack, you can hear the audio in stereo. (Maintenance >Audio
>Headphone Out in the setup menu must be set to
Stereo.)
6.
ASSIGN. (assignable) 0 switch
You can assign a function using Operation
>Assignable Switch in the setup menu
Off is assigned to these switches when the camcorder is shipped from the factory.
This is a momentary type switch. Each press of the switch turns the function assigned to this switch on or off.
7.
GAIN switch
Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match the lighting conditions during shooting. The gain values corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be selected using Operation >Gain Switch in
the setup menu (page 91) (factory settings are
L=0 dB, M=6 dB, and H=12 dB).
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds.
8.
OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic contrast control) switch
Switches the video signal output from the camera module, between the following two.
BARS: Output the color bar signal.
CAM: Output the video signal being shot. When this is selected, you can switch DCC
1)
on and off.
1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the subject, objects in the background will be lost in the glare. The
DCC function will suppress the high intensity and restore much of the lost detail. It is particularly effective for shooting in the following cases.
ˎ
ˎ Shooting a subject indoors, against a background through a window
9.
WHITE BAL (white balance memory) switch
Controls adjustment of the white balance.
PRST: Adjust the color temperature to the preset value (the factory default setting: 3200K). Use this setting when you have no time to adjust the white balance.
A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment settings already stored in A or B. Push the
AUTO W/B BAL switch (page 5) to the
WHITE position to automatically adjust the white balance and save the adjustment settings in memory A or memory B.
B (ATW
1)
):When this switch is set to B and
Operation >White Setting >White Switch
<B> is set to [ATW] in the setup menu, ATW is activated.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even when ATW is in use.
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds.
1) ATW (Auto Tracing White balance): The white balance of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for varying lighting conditions.
[Note]
It may not be possible to adjust to the appropriate colors using ATW, depending on the lighting and subject conditions.
Examples:
ˎ When a single color dominates the subject, such as sky, sea, ground, or flowers. high or extremely low color temperature.
If execution of automatic tracing by the ATW function takes an unacceptably long time or only results in an inadequate effect, then execute the
AWB function.
10.
Switch cover
Open this cover to use the MENU ON/OFF switch or the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch.
11.
MENU ON/OFF switch
To use the switch, open the cover.
This switch is used to display the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen. Each time the switch is pushed down, the menu screen is turned on and off.
The function of this switch is the same as that of the MENU button in the thumbnail screen operations section.
[Note]
It is not possible to turn off the menu screen by closing the cover.
12.
MENU CANCEL/PRST (preset) /ESCAPE switch
To use the switch, open the cover.
This switch has different functions depending on whether or not a menu is displayed.
Use the switch in the following way when the menu is displayed.
CANCEL/PRST: Pushing this switch up to this position after a setting is changed in the setup menu displays the message to confirm whether the previous settings are canceled.
Pushing this switch up to this position again cancels the previous settings.
Pushing this switch up to this position before a setting is changed in the setup menu or after a setting change is canceled in the setup menu displays the message to confirm whether the setting is reset to the initial value. Pushing this switch up to this position again resets the settings to the initial value.
ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page, which has a hierarchical structure, is opened.
000
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
Each time the switch is pushed to this position, the page returns to one stage higher in the hierarchy.
Use the switch in the following way when the menu is not displayed.
CANCEL/PRST: Each time this switch is pushed upward, a window to confirm the menu settings and status of the camcorder appears
on the viewfinder screen (page 12). The
window consists of several pages, which are switched each time the switch is pushed upward.
ESCAPE: To clear the page, push this switch down to the OFF position.
13.
UTILITY SD card slot
Insert an SD card for saving camcorder settings.
14.
ACCESS indicator
Lights up orange when the SD card is being accessed.
LCD Monitor Side (2)
[1]
[2]
7 8 9
10 11 12
4
5
1
2
3
6
13 14 15 16 17
1.
Built-in speaker
The speaker can be used to monitor E-E
1)
sound during recording, and playback sound during playback. The speaker also sounds alarms to
reinforce visual warnings (page 128).
If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE jack, the speaker output is suppressed automatically.
1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric.” In E-E mode, video and audio signals input to the camcorder are output after passing through internal electric circuits only.
This can be used to check input signals.
2.
LCD monitor
Displays remaining battery capacity, remaining media capacity, audio levels, time data, and so on.
It also allows you to check camera and playback
You can adjust the position and angle of the LCD monitor.
3.
WARNING indicator
Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs
4.
ACCESS indicator
Lights up in blue when data is written to or read from the recording media.
5.
Audio control section (page 9)
6.
Thumbnail screen operation section (page 9)
7.
F REV (fast reverse) button and indicator
This plays back at high speed in the reverse direction. The playback speed changes in the order
×4 ×15 ×24 with each press of the button.
The indicator lights during high-speed playback in the reverse direction.
000
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
8.
PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator
Press this button to view playback video images using the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor.
The indicator lights during playback.
Press this button again during playback to pause, outputting a still image. At this time the indicator flashes at a rate of once per second.
Pressing the F REV or F FWD button during playback or pause starts high speed playback in the forward or reverse direction.
9.
F FWD (fast forward) button and indicator
This plays back at high speed in the forward direction. The playback speed changes in the order
×4 ×15 ×24 with each press of the button.
The indicator lights during high-speed playback in the forward direction.
10.
PREV (previous) button
This jumps to the first frame of the current clip.
If you press this together with the F REV button, the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded clip on the recording media.
If you press this button twice in rapid succession, the jump is to the first frame of the preceding clip (or the first frame of the current clip when no preceding clips exist).
11.
STOP button
Press this button to stop playback.
12.
NEXT button
This jumps to the first frame of the next clip.
If you press this together with the F FWD button, the jump is to the last frame of the last recorded clip on the recording media.
13.
DISP SEL (display selection)/EXPAND
(expand function) button
With each press of this button, the display in the
LCD monitor changes as follows.
Display indication
Video with superimposed information (CHAR)
Description
The LCD monitor displays the same text information as the viewfinder.
Display indication
Video without superimposed information (MONI)
Status display
(STATUS)
Description
Only the video appears.
Counter indications, warnings, audio levels, and similar information appear.
No video image appears.
The EXPAND button function will be supported in a future upgrade.
14.
HOLD (display hold) button
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data displayed in the LCD monitor. (The timecode generator continues running.) Pressing this button again releases the hold.
For details about the time data display, see page 12.
15.
RESET/RETURN button
Resets the value shown in the time data display in the LCD monitor. According to the settings of the
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch (page 9) and the
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch (page 9), this button
resets the display as follows.
Switch settings RESET/RETURN button operation
Reset counter to 00:00:00:00.
DISPLAY switch:
COUNTER
DISPLAY switch:
TC
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch:
SET
Reset timecode to
00:00:00:00.
Switch settings
DISPLAY switch:
U-BIT
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch:
SET
RESET/RETURN button operation
Reset user bits data
00:00:00:00.
a) to a) Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the media, those bits which can be used to record useful information for the user such as scene number, shooting place, etc.
This button returns to the previous screen when pressed during thumbnail screen display or essence mark thumbnail screen display.
16.
DISPLAY switch
This cycles the data displayed in the time data display in the LCD monitor through the sequence
COUNTER, TC, and U-BIT (page 12).
COUNTER: Display recording/playback duration counter.
TC: Display timecode.
U-BIT: Display user bits data.
17.
BRIGHT (brightness) button
Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor backlight.
Each press of the button selects the next setting in the order shown in the following table. If you press the button with the LCD monitor off, the LCD backlight comes on in the H state.
M
L
Setting
H
OFF
LCD monitor backlight
High (select this to view the LCD monitor outdoors in the daytime)
Brightness between H and L
Low (select this to view the LCD monitor indoors or outdoors at night)
Off (the display is also off)
000
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
Thumbnail screen operations section and audio control section
1
2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 1011
1.
Thumbnail indicator
This lights when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
2.
THUMBNAIL button
Press this button to display the thumbnail
screen (page 75) and to carry out a thumbnail
operation.
Press once more to return to the original display.
3.
SET button and arrow buttons
Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit settings, and for thumbnail screen operations.
When the menu is displayed, press this button to select an item or to confirm the setting change.
4.
MENU button
Each press of this button turns the setup menu display on and off.
The function of this button is the same as that of the MENU ON/OFF switch.
5.
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/recording run) switch
Selects the operating mode of the internal timecode generator. The operating mode is set as explained below, depending on the position of the switch.
12
F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless of whether the camcorder is recording. Use this setting when synchronizing the timecode with external timecode.
SET: Sets the timecode or user bits.
R-RUN: Timecode advances only during recording.
Use this setting to have a consecutive timecode on the recording media.
“Setting the Timecode” (page 44)
“Setting the User Bits” (page 44)
6.
LEVEL CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio channel
1/2/3/4 recording level) knobs
Adjust the audio levels to be recorded on channels
1, 2, 3, and 4 when the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 and AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switches are set to
MANUAL.
7.
AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 (audio channel 3/4 adjustment method selection) switches
Select the audio level adjustment method for audio channels 3 and 4.
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
8.
ESSENCE MARK button
By pressing this button when a thumbnail display is on the screen, you can view the following thumbnail displays of the essence-marked frames of the selected clip, depending on the item selected in a list displayed on the screen.
All: Thumbnail display of all frames marked with essence marks.
Rec Start: Thumbnail display of frames marked with Rec Start marks and of the first frames of clips (when the first frames are not marked with Rec Start marks).
Shot Mark1: Thumbnail display of the frames marked with Shot Mark 1.
Shot Mark2: Thumbnail display of the frames marked with Shot Mark 2.
You can also select Shot Mark 0 and Shot Mark 3 to
Shot Mark 9.
If a clip is recorded using planning metadata that defines names for shot mark 0 to shot mark 9, the selection options in the list are displayed by the defined names.
9.
SHIFT button
Use this in combination with other buttons.
10.
PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/CLOCK switch
Selects the type of timecode to record.
PRESET: Record new timecode on the media.
REGEN: Record timecode continuous with the existing timecode recorded on the media.
Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-
RUN switch, the camcorder operates in R-RUN mode.
CLOCK: Record timecode synchronized to the internal clock. Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates in F-RUN mode.
11.
AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1/2 adjustment method selection) switches
Select the audio level adjustment method for audio channels 1 and 2.
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
12.
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio channel
1/2/3/4 input selection) switches
Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 1, 2, 3 and 4.
FRONT: Audio input signals from the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector
REAR: Audio input signals from an audio device connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors
WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the UHF portable tuner if it is attached
000
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
Handle and Memory Card Slot Side
SxS memory card slots (page 29)
6 5 4 3
9
12
10
13
11
1.
ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches
You can assign a function using Operation
>Assignable Switch in the setup menu
Off is assigned to these switches when the
2 1 camcorder is shipped from the factory.
2.
GPS module
Contains a built-in GPS module.
7
8
[Note]
Do not grasp this part of the camcorder when the GPS function is in use.
3.
PC connector
Used to put this camcorder into USB connection mode and use it as an external storage device for a computer. When a computer is connected to this connector, every memory card inserted in the camcorder is recognized as a drive on the computer.
4.
External device connector
Reserved for use in a future upgrade.
5.
USB wireless LAN module connector
Connect to an IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN
Module (supplied), CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN
Adaptor (option), or combination of CBK-NA1
Network Adaptor Kit (option) and modem (option) to enable communications with wireless LAN devices and networks.
“Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 58)
“Connecting to the Internet” (page 61)
6.
Insert an SD card for recording proxy data.
7.
(NFC) mark
A built-in NFC antenna is provided.
8.
Network connector
Connects to a network via a wired LAN connection using a LAN cable (sold separately).
[CAUTION]
ˎ For safety, do not connect the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this port.
Follow the instructions for this port.
ˎ When you connect the LAN cable of the unit to peripheral device, use a shielded-type cable to prevent malfunction due to radiation noise.
“Connecting to the Internet” (page 61)
9.
HDMI connector
Connect an HDMI device, such as a monitor or recording unit, to output HD or SD HDMI video and audio signals.
10.
GENLOCK IN (genlock signal input) connector (BNC type)
This connector inputs a reference signal when the camcorder is to be genlocked or when timecode is to be synchronized with external equipment.
The supported reference signals vary depending on the current system frequency as shown in the following table.
System frequency Supported reference signals
59.94i
59.94P
50i
50P
29.97P
25P
23.98P
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
1080/50i, 576/50i
1080/50i, 576/50i
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
1080/50i, 576/50i
1080/23.98PsF
11.
TC IN (timecode input) connector (BNC type)
To apply an external lock to the timecode of the camcorder, input the reference timecode.
“Setting the Timecode” (page 44)
12.
VIDEO OUT connector (BNC type)
Outputs video signals for monitoring.
13.
TC OUT (timecode output) connector (BNC type)
To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the timecode of this camcorder, connect this connector to the external VTR’s timecode input connector.
000
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
Tally Indicator and Connector Section
3 4
1
2
5 6
1 7 8 9 10
11
1.
TALLY (back tally) indicator (red)
Lights up during recording. It will not light if the
TALLY switch is set to OFF. It also flashes when the
WARNING indicator operates. The tally indicator on the front of the viewfinder and the REC indication on the viewfinder screen light or flash in the same manner.
“Error/Warning System” (page 128)
2.
TALLY switch
Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator function.
3.
EARPHONE jack (stereo, minijack)
You can monitor the E-E sound during recording and playback sound during playback. When an alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound through the earphone. Plugging an earphone into the jack automatically cuts off the built-in speaker.
You can select monaural or stereo using
Maintenance >Audio >Headphone Out in the setup menu.
4.
AUDIO IN selector switch
Select the audio source you connect to the AUDIO
IN CH1/CH2 connectors.
LINE: When connecting a stereo amplifier or other external audio signal source
AES/EBU: When connecting an external digital audio signal source
MIC: When connecting a microphone.
5.
+48V/OFF (+48V external power source on/ off) switch
Switch between the following settings, according to the microphone used for audio input.
+48V: Microphone requiring external power source (phantom power)
OFF: Microphone using internal power source or not requiring a power source
6.
SDI IN (SDI input) connector (BNC type)
Connector used when connecting an external SDI signal source to the camcorder.
7.
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel 1 and channel 2 input) connectors (XLR type, 3-pin, female)
Connect to audio equipment or a microphone.
8.
Bottom cover
This is provided for protecting the cables connected to the connectors on the rear panel.
By loosening the screws which retain the cover to the bottom of the camcorder, you can adjust the position of the cover depending on the size and shape of the microphone or audio cable plugs.
After adjusting the position, tighten the screws to secure the cover.
9.
AUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5-pin, male)
Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4.
The audio signals are selected by the MONITOR switch.
10.
REMOTE connector (8-pin)
Connect a remote control unit to control the camcorder remotely.
[Note]
Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control Unit to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the camcorder
POWER switch.
11.
SDI OUT 1/2 connectors (BNC type)
Outputs an HD SDI or SD SDI signal (with embedded audio). The output from this connector can be turned on or off using Operation >Input/
Output >SDI Out1 Output or SDI Out2 Output in the setup menu.
000
1. Overview
Screen Display
Information Screen
1213
11
910
8
1.
Recording mode indicator
2.
File format indicator
3.
Status display
PB: Appears during media playback.
NDF: Appears when non-drop-frame timecode is selected.
EXT-LK: Appears when the internal timecode generator is locked to an external signal input to the TC IN (timecode input) connector.
HOLD: Appears when the operation mode of the internal timecode generator is set to R-RUN and stopped.
4.
System frequency indicator
Indicates the system frequency of video being currently played or recorded.
5.
Audio format indicator
Indicates the audio recording format or the audio format of clip being currently played.
Indicator
16bit
Recording format
HD420 HQ
DVCAM
MPEG IMX 50
1 2 3 4 5
6
7
Indicator
24bit
Recording format
HD422 50
MPEG IMX 50
XAVC Intra
XAVC Long
6.
Audio level meters
Indicates the audio recording or playback levels of channels 1 to 4.
7.
Remaining battery capacity indicator
Displays the battery remaining capacity icon and the remaining recording time.
8.
Remaining media capacity indicator
Shows bar segments indicating the remaining capacity of recording media in the slots.
9.
Warning indicator area
Displays warnings when trouble with recording occurs.
For details, see “Error/Warning System” (page 128).
10.
Clip name display
Displays the name of the clip currently recording when recording, or displays the name of the next clip to be recorded during recording standby.
11.
Time data display
Switches displays of duration, timecode, and user bits data, depending on the position of the
DISPLAY switch.
Displays the type of data currently shown in the time data display, as follows.
TCG: Recorded timecode
TCR: Playback timecode
UBG: Recorded user bits
UBR; Playback user bits
CNT: Counter
DUR: Duration
CLK: Time display (when the PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch is set to CLOCK)
When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the timecode value, the timecode is displayed in the format shown below. When the HOLD button is pressed again to release the hold, the timecode is displayed in the normal format.
The three dots indicate that the timecode and counter progress are displayed in hold mode.
12.
Resolution indicator
Indicates the resolution of the output video.
13.
Recording format indicator
Indicates the current recording format or the recording format of clip being currently played.
Status Screens
The status screens allow you to check camcorder settings and various types of status information.
When no menu is displayed, push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch up to the CANCEL/
PRST position to display the status screen. Each push selects the next status screen.
The following status screens can be displayed.
Camera Status screen
Displays settings and status information related to shooting.
Display item Description
Gain Gain level in dB units
Shutter
Gamma
White
Electronic shutter status
Gamma category and curve
White balance mode setting
Gain Switch GAIN switch status
Zebra
Iris
Zebra pattern status
Iris f-stop value
Focal Length Focal length
Focus Distance Focus distance
Depth Of Field Depth of field
Zoom Speed Zoom speed configured for the lens ZOOM button
Audio Status screen
Displays settings and status information related to audio input and output.
000
1. Overview: Screen Display
Display item
CH 1/CH 2/CH
3/CH 4
Description
Audio level, input source, reference input level, and wind noise reduction filter settings for each channel
System Status screen
Displays settings and status information related to recording.
Display item
System
Frequency
File System
Rec Format
Clip
Continuous
Rec
Title Prefix
Picture Size
Simul Rec
Description
System frequency
Recording mode
Recording format
Clip Continuous Rec function on/ off setting
Clip name prefix
Picture size
Simul Rec function on/off
Rec Function Enabled special recording format and settings
Picture Cache
Rec
Number
Picture cache function on/off setting
Clip name suffix
Gamma
Proxy
Recording
Mode
Gamma category in use
Proxy data recording function on/ off setting
Video Output Status screen
Displays settings and status information related to video output.
Display item Description
SDI
HDMI
Video
SDI OUT connector output settings (output picture size, output form, output rate, superimposition)
HDMI connector output settings
(output picture size, output form, output rate, superimposition)
VIDEO OUT connector output settings (output picture size, superimposition)
Network Status 1 screen
The Network Status 1 screen displays settings and status information related to the network.
Display item Description
Setting Network setting status
Wireless
Network
Wireless network setting status
Device Name Name of device attached to the
USB wireless LAN module connector
Display item
IP Address
(Wireless)
MAC Addr.
(Wireless)
Wired LAN
Wired LAN
Remote
IP Address
(Wired)
Description
IP address of wireless LAN connection
MAC address of device attached the USB wireless LAN module connector
Wired LAN network connection status
Remote control enabled/disabled state when connected using a
LAN cable
IP address of wired LAN connection
Network Status 2 screen
The Network Status 2 screen displays settings and status information related to streaming.
Display item
NW Client
Mode Status
CCM Name
Description
Network client mode status
For details about the status, see
Name of the connected CCM when using network client mode
Streaming distribution status Streaming
Status
Streaming Size Picture size of the currently selected streaming setting
Streaming Bit
Rate
Bit rate of the currently selected streaming setting
Streaming Type Type of the currently selected streaming setting
Display item Description
Streaming
Dest. Add.
Streaming destination address
Streaming
Dest. Port
Number of
Distribution
File Transfer
Streaming destination port
Number of streaming distribution destinations
File transfer progress status
Transfer to: Server name of file transfer destination
Network client mode status
Status display
Off
State
CCM not connected
Description
Network client mode is off.
Connected CCM connected Network client mode is on, CCM is connected, and
CCM control is enabled.
Connecting Connecting to
CCM
(disconnected)
Awaiting CCM connection standby
Attempting to connect to CCM (or disconnecting). Wait until connection
(disconnection) is successful. If the status does not change from
“Connecting,” the
CCM address setting may be incorrect.
Check that the address is set correctly.
Network client mode is on, but the network setting is off. Enable the network setting to connect to the
CCM.
000
1. Overview: Screen Display
Status display
Address
Error
Auth.
Failed
No Inet
Access
Cert. not
Valid
State Description
CCM address error
CCM user name/ password error
Internet connection error
CCM certification not valid error
The host name or IP address of the CCM to connect may be incorrect. Check that the setting is correct.
The user name or password used to connect to the CCM may be incorrect.
Check that the setting is correct.
Cannot connect to the network. The network settings may be incorrect.
Check the network settings.
The CCM certificate is not valid. The date setting may be invalid. Check the date setting.
Battery Status screen
Displays the status of the battery attached to the camcorder.
Display item Description
Detected
Battery
Detected type of the battery
Remaining Remaining capacity (%)
Charge Count Number of recharges
Capacity Remaining capacity (Ah)
Voltage
Manufacture
Date
Voltage
Date of battery manufacture
Power Source Power supply source
Supplied
Voltage
Supplied power source voltage
Assignable Button Status screen
Displays the names of functions assigned to assignable switches.
Media Status screen
Displays the status of the recording media.
Display item
SxSA
SxSB
SD Proxy
SD Utility
Description
Remaining capacity (bar graph and remaining time display) and media life of media in slot A
Remaining capacity (bar graph and remaining time display) and media life of media in slot B
Remaining capacity (bar graph and remaining time display) and media life (displayed only if available) of media in PROXY SD card slot
Remaining capacity (bar graph and remaining capacity) and media life (displayed only if available) of media in UTILITY SD card slot
A mark is displayed if the media is protected.
Viewfinder Screen
The viewfinder screen displays images during shooting (recording or recording standby) and playback with camcorder information superimposed on the display.
You can toggle the display of information on/off using the DISPLAY switch.
The information to display is linked to the settings in Operation >Super Impose in the setup menu, and the settings of the corresponding switches.
000
1. Overview: Screen Display
36
34
37
35
33
32
30
31
29
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
8
28 27 26 25
1.
Extender indicator
Displays the status of the digital extender function and lens extender function.
EX: Appears when the lens extender function is ON
X2D: Appears when the digital extender function
(×2) is ON
X3D: Appears when the digital extender function
(×3) is ON
X4D: Appears when the digital extender function
(×4) is ON
EX2D: Appears when both the lens extender function and digital extender function (×2) are
ON
EX3D: Appears when both the lens extender function and digital extender function (×3) are
ON
EX4D: Appears when both the lens extender function and digital extender function (×4) are
ON
Turn the digital extender on/off using an assignable switch assigned with the Digital
Extender function.
9
10 11 12
13 14
15 16
17
19
21
23
18
20
22
24
[Note]
The digital extender cannot be turned on when Slow & Quick
Motion is enabled.
2.
Zoom position indicator (with lens mounted)
Displays the zoom position of the zoom lens in the range 0 to 99.
3.
Color temperature indicator
Displays the color temperature of the white balance.
4.
Focus position indicator (with lens mounted)
Displays the focus position as a distance to the subject (unit: meters).
5.
Iris position indicator (with lens mounted)
Displays the iris position setting.
6.
Electric color temperature filter indicator
Appears when the CC5600K function is on.
7.
Depth of field indicator (serial lens mounted)
Displays the depth of field using a bar. The units for display are set using Operation >Display On/Off
>Lens Info in the setup menu, and can be set to meters or feet.
8.
Recording mode indicator
Displays the following recording operation states of the camcorder.
Indicator
Rec
Meaning
During recording
Stby Recording standby
Cont Rec Clip continuous recording in progress
Cont Stby Recording standby in clip continuous recording mode
S&Q Rec Recording in progress in Slow &
Quick Motion mode
S&Q Stby
Rec
Recording standby in Slow & Quick
Motion mode
Recording in picture cache mode
Cache
Int Rec
Int Stby
Int Stby
Sml Rec
Sml Stby
CALL
Recording standby in picture cache mode
Recording in progress in Interval Rec mode
Recording standby in Interval Rec mode
Recording paused in Interval Rec mode (during pause intervals)
Recording in progress in Simul Rec mode
Recording standby in Simul Rec mode
Call received from external connected device
Green tally is displayed when the camcorder is in the following states.
ˎ Maintenance >Camera Config >HD-SDI Remote
I/F is set to Green Tally in the setup menu and a recording control signal is output from the SDI
OUT connector.
ˎ Green tally signal received (when a camera adaptor is mounted on the camcorder and a camera extension unit is connected)
9.
Wireless receiver function indicator
Displays “W” when a slot-in receiver is attached to the camcorder, and displays the reception level for each channel that can be used by the receiver
(1ch, 2ch, or 4ch).
Normal: Displays the strength of the received signal level by the number of white segment indicators.
Analog receiver muting/Digital receiver error rate warning: Displays the strength of the received signal level by the number of gray segment indicators.
If the received level exceeds the peak: Displays “P” in place of the indicator.
1)
Receiver battery is low: The corresponding channel number and indicators flash.
1)
1) When using the DWR-S02D
10.
S&Q Motion (Slow & Quick) frame rate indicator
Displays the shooting frame rate when the camcorder is set to Slow & Quick Motion recording mode.
11.
12.
Battery capacity/voltage display
Displays the following indicators according to the type of battery power source.
Battery type
Info battery
Anton/Bauer battery
Other batteries
Indicator
Battery remaining capacity icon and remaining recording time
Remaining battery capacity (% indicator)
Input voltage
13.
Recording format (picture size) indicator
Displays the picture size of clips recorded onto SxS memory cards.
14.
Recording format (system frequency and scan method) indicator
Displays the currently configured camcorder system frequency and the recording format scan method.
15.
Recording format (codec) indicator
Displays the format name of clips recorded onto
000
1. Overview: Screen Display
SxS memory cards.
16.
Gamma indicator
Display the gamma setting.
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Gamma
Off
On
Menu settings
Paint >Gamma setting
Gamma Gamma
Category
—
Off
—
—
On STD
Gamma
Select
Indicator
—
—
—
Gamma
Off
STD1 DVW STD1
On On
HG
User
STD2 x4.5
STD3 x3.5
STD2
STD3
STD4 240M STD4
STD5 R709 STD5
STD6 x5.0
HG1
3250G36
HG2
4600G30
HG3
3259G40
HG4
4609G33
User 1
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
STD6
HG1
HG2
HG3
HG4
User 1
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
17.
Timecode external lock indicator
Displays timecode lock when the timecode is input from an external source.
18.
Wired LAN connection status
Displays the wired LAN network setting and connection status using icons.
Icon
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Network
Condition
Off
On
State
Maintenance
>Network
>Wired LAN
—
Disable
Enable
Network connection status
—
—
Connecting to LAN
—
—
(flashing)
Connected to LAN
LAN connection error
19.
Streaming indicator
Displays the status of streaming using icons.
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Streaming
Status
State
Maintenance
>Streaming
>Setting
Maintenance
>Network
Client Mode
>Setting
Streaming state/Icon
Off
On
—
Off
On
—
Off
Off
—
–
Not streaming
Streaming
Error
The following icons are displayed when streaming from a CCM.
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Streaming
Status
On
State
Maintenance
>Streaming
>Setting
Off
Maintenance
>Network
Client Mode
>Setting
On
Streaming state/Icon
Not streaming
Streaming
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Network
Condition
On
State
Maintenance
>Network
>Wireless
Network
Network connection status
Icon
Off
Wi-Fi Access
Point
—
Connecting using Wi-Fi 1)
Wi-Fi standby
(connected)
—
(flashing)
Wi-Fi Station Connecting using Wi-Fi
(flashing)
Access point search
Access point connection
[Note]
Icons are not displayed before streaming starts.
20.
Wireless network status indicator
Displays the network setting and connection status using icons.
Icon
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Network
Condition
Off
State
Maintenance
>Network
>Wireless
Network
—
Network connection status
— —
Modem
Icon varies with signal strength.
Access point connection error
1)
Connecting using 3G/4G
Connected using 3G/4G
3G/4G connection error
1)
(flashing)
1) This icon is displayed in the following cases.
ˎ When a device is not attached
ˎ When a device is attached with different settings
21.
Proxy indicator
Displays “Proxy” when proxy recording is on
(Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Setting in the setup menu is set to On). During setup,
“Proxy” blinks. “Proxy Rec” is displayed during proxy recording. Displays and transfer rate (%) during proxy file transfer. When transfer finishes,
000
1. Overview: Screen Display disappears to indicate 100% transfer.
22.
Network client mode indicator
Displays the status of the connection to the CCM
(PWS-100RX1 Network RX Station configured as
Connection Control Manager) using icons when network client mode is on.
Operation
>Display
On/Off >NW
Client Mode
Status
State
Maintenance
>Network
Client Mode
>Setting
State
Icon
Off
On
—
Off
On
—
—
—
—
CCM connected
Connecting to
CCM
(disconnected) (flashing)
CCM connection standby
CCM connection error
–
For details about errors, see
23.
Video signal indicator
Displays the video signal in realtime as a waveform, vectorscope, or histogram.
24.
Recording media state/remaining capacity indicator for each media slot
Displays the state and remaining capacity of the media in SxS slot A, SxS slot B, and the PROXY SD card slot.
SxS slot icon indicator
* SxS slot A (SxSA) example. The icons for SxS slot B are labeled SxSB.
Icon
–
Media state
Media not inserted or not mounted
Media mounted
Media mounting
(flashing)
Recording (active)
(orange bar)
Playback (active)
(green indicator)
Recording/playback (active)
(orange bar
+ green indicator)
SD card (for proxy data recording) icon indicator
Icon
–
Media state
Media not inserted or not mounted
Media mounted
Media mounting
(flashing)
Recording (active)
(orange bar)
The remaining recording time is displayed numerically.
25.
Audio level meter indicators
Displays the levels of audio channels 1 and 2.
26.
Clip name display
Displays the name of the clip currently recording when recording, or displays the name of the next clip to be recorded during recording standby.
27.
Focus assist indicator
Displays a detection frame (focus area marker) indicating the area for detection of degree of focus, and a level bar (focus assist indicator) indicating the degree of focus within that area.
28.
Time data display
Displays the remaining recording/playback time, timecode, user bits, etc., as selected by the
29.
SD card indicator for saving configuration data
Displays the state of the SD card (for saving configuration data) inserted in the UTILITY SD card slot.
Icon
—
Media state
SD card not inserted or not mounted
SD card mounted
Mounted SD card is protected
(flashing)
SD card mounting
30.
SDI output REC trigger indicator
Displays the superimposition state of the recording command sent to the SDI connector output.
It is displayed when Maintenance >Camera Config
>HD SDI Remote I/F is set to “Characters” in the setup menu.
31.
ALAC indicator
Displays “ALAC” when the ALAC (Auto Lens
Aberration Correction) function is set to be performed automatically.
ALAC will be performed automatically when an ALAC-compatible lens is attached, the ALAC function is enabled, and Maintenance >Camera
Config >ALAC is set to “Auto” in the setup menu.
32.
AE (auto iris) mode indicator
Displays the current operating mode of the auto iris function using an icon and auto iris override level.
Icon Meaning
Backlight mode
Standard mode
Icon Meaning
Spotlight mode
33.
Auto focus mode indicator (when an auto focus lens is attached only)
Displays the focus adjustment mode of the camcorder.
ˎ
ˎ MF (manual focus)
ˎ
ˎ Full MF (full manual focus)
34.
ND filter indicator
Displays the position number of the currently
When “Electrical CC” is assigned to an assignable switch, the position (A/B/C/D) of the electrical
CC filter is displayed on the right of the ND filter indicator (1 to 4).
35.
Gain indicator
Displays the gain setting (dB), set using the GAIN switch, of the video amplifier.
36.
Shutter mode/shutter speed indicator/Flash
Band Reduce status indicator
Displays the shutter mode or shutter speed.
“Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 38)
If Flash Band Reduce (page 94) is set to On in
the Operation menu, FBR is displayed when the shutter is in a non-operating state.
37.
White balance mode indicator
Displays the currently selected white balance automatic adjustment memory.
ATW: ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) mode
W:A: Memory A mode
W:B: Memory B mode
W:C: Memory C mode
W:P: Preset mode
3200K: Appears when an assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW 3200K is on
4300K: Appears when an assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW 4300K is on
000
1. Overview: Screen Display
5600K: Appears when an assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW 5600K is on
6300K: Appears when an assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW 6300K is on
Lens Supplied with the PXW-X400KC
The PXW-X400KC is supplied with a lens.
2
1
7
1.
Used for the shuttle shot function.
2.
Iris gain adjustment trimmer (page 40)
3.
Iris push auto switch
When the iris mode switch is in the M (manual) position, press this switch for instantaneous auto iris adjustment. The iris is automatically adjusted while the switch is held down.
4.
Iris mode switch
A (auto): The iris is adjusted automatically.
M (manual): Adjust the iris with the iris ring.
5.
Zoom seesaw switch
This is enabled when the zoom servo/manual knob is in the SERVO position. Set to the W (wide angle) position when you want wide-angle, and set to the T (telephoto) side when you want telephoto.
Press the switch harder for a faster zoom action, or softer for slower zoom action.
9
10
11
12
6.
RET switch
While pressed, the last few seconds recorded appear on the viewfinder screen (Rec Review)
7.
F.B. lock screw / F.B. adjustment ring
8.
Positioning pin
When attaching the lens, align this pin with the recess in the top center of lens mount on the camcorder.
9.
Macro button / macro ring
Press and hold the macro button and turn the macro ring to adjust the focus (minimum focus distance: 10 mm).
10.
Iris ring
For manual iris adjustment, set the iris mode switch to the M (manual) position, then turn this ring.
13
14
15
16
17
18
[Note]
Always set the iris mode switch to the M (manual) position first and then adjust the iris.
11.
Zoom lever / zoom ring
For manual zoom adjustment, set the zoom servo/ manual switch to the MANU position, then operate the lever/ring.
12.
Focus ring
Turn this ring to adjust the focus.
13.
Zoom servo / manual knob
SERVO (servo): Selects power zoom. Operate the zoom with the zoom seesaw switch.
MANU (manual): Selects manual zoom. Operate the zoom with the zoom lever/zoom ring.
14.
Power/iris control cable
Connect to the LENS connector on the camcorder.
15.
VTR switch
Use this to start and stop recording. Press once to start recording, then press once more to stop.
16.
Shtl (shuttle) switch (page 18)
Used for the shuttle shot function.
17.
Zoom remote control connector
Connect to an optional zoom servo controller to enable remote control of zooming.
18.
Used for the shuttle shot function.
About shuttle shot
Shuttle shot is a shooting function for rapidly moving to a preset zoom position set by the user.
1
Set the DIP switch 1 to ON.
2
Set the zoom position that you want to register.
3
Press and hold the Memo switch and press the
Shtl (shuttle) switch.
The zoom position is registered as the shuttle position.
000
1. Overview: Screen Display
To move rapidly to the shuttle position, press and hold the Shtl (shuttle) switch.
The zoom rapidly returns to the previous zoom position when the Shtl (shuttle) switch is released.
Current zoom position
Shuttle position
Original zoom position
Press and hold Shtl
(shuttle) switch
Release Shtl
(shuttle) switch
Lens Supplied with the PXW-X400KF
The PXW-X400KF is supplied with a lens.
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
1.
PUSH AF (auto focus) button
When adjusting focus in manual mode, pressing this button enables auto focus adjustment on the subject.
Press the button to activate auto focus, and release the button when the subject is in focus.
2.
FOCUS (adjustment mode) switch
A (Auto): Activates the normal auto focus function.
You can also adjust the focus manually using the focus ring, even when the switch is in the
“A” position.
M (manual): Selects manual mode for focus adjustment with the focus ring.
In manual mode, auto focus adjustment is also possible, by pressing the PUSH AF button.
3.
MACRO switch
When this switch is in the ON position, macro mode is enabled, allowing focusing over the whole range (5 cm
1) to ∞) including the macro range (from 5 cm
1)
to 80 cm from the front of the lens).
This operation is independent of whether the focus adjustment mode is auto or manual.
1) At the wide-angle setting
4.
Iris ring
For manual iris adjustment, set the IRIS switch to the M (manual) position, then turn this ring.
5.
Zoom ring
For manual zoom adjustment, set the ZOOM switch to the MANUAL position, then turn this ring.
6.
Focus ring
Turn this ring to adjust the focus.
When the ring is set to AF/MF mode, the faster you turn ring the faster the focusing mechanism operates, minimizing the amount of turning
10
11
12
13
14 required for focusing.
When you slide the focus ring back (toward the camcorder), the focus mode is set to Full MF mode, in which all focus adjustments are manual
7.
Flange focal length adjustment button
Press this to adjust the flange focal length (the distance from the lens mounting flange plane to
the focusing plane) (page 25).
8.
Zoom control connector (8-pin)
Connect to an optional zoom servo controller to enable remote control of zooming.
9.
ZOOM switch
SERVO: Selects power zoom. Operate the zoom with the power zoom lever.
MANUAL (manual): Selects manual zoom. Operate the zoom with the zoom ring.
10.
PUSH AUTO (instant auto iris) button
When the IRIS switch is in the M position for manual adjustment, press this button for instantaneous auto adjustment. The iris is automatically adjusted while the button is held down.
11.
IRIS (adjustment mode) switch
A (auto): The iris is adjusted automatically.
M (manual): Adjust the iris with the iris ring.
12.
Power zoom lever
This is enabled when the ZOOM switch is in the
SERVO position. Set to the W (wide angle) position when you want wide-angle, and set to the T
(telephoto) side when you want telephoto.
Press the lever harder for a faster zoom action, or softer for slower zoom action.
Notes about auto focus
ˎ It may be difficult to focus on the subject in the following cases. If this does happen, use manual focusing.
– If the subject has no contrast
– If the subject is moving rapidly
– When shooting point light sources, under street lighting or at night
000
1. Overview: Screen Display
– When there are very bright objects close to the subject
– When shooting through a glass window
ˎ If there are a number of objects within the screen at close and far range, the focus may not be on the intended subject. In this case, with the subject on which you want to focus in the
ˎ center of the screen, press the PUSH AF button.
ˎ After focusing with the PUSH AF button, if you operate the zoom or adjust the iris, the depth of field may become shallower, losing crisp focus.
In such cases, press the PUSH AF button once more.
ˎ If you focus at wide-angle then zoom to telephoto, the subject may no longer be in
ˎ focus.
ˎ It may take time until the image is in focus while using the slow shutter mode.
13.
RET (return video) button
You can assign a function and use this as an
When “Lens RET” is assigned to this button (factory default setting), press this after recording stops to review the last few seconds recorded on the
viewfinder screen (Rec Review) (page 46).
Press this button (single click) during recording or playback to record a Shot Mark 1 mark, or double-
click to record a Shot Mark 2 mark (page 48).
14.
VTR button
Use this to start and stop recording. Press once to start recording, then press once more to stop.
Viewfinder
16
9 10 11
15 14 13 12
1.
Connector
Connect to the VF connector (26-pin) on the camcorder.
2.
Viewfinder cable
3.
Slide stopper
Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the camcorder when it is slid from side to side.
4.
Eyecup
5.
Diopter adjustment ring
Turn this ring to adjust the image until it is in sharpest focus.
6.
Eyepiece
You can raise this up when required by the situation.
7.
Viewfinder barrel
You can raise this up or rotate when required by the situation.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8.
Tally indicator
Lights up when recording is started by a press of the REC START button on this camcorder, the VTR button on the lens, or the START/STOP button on the remote control unit.
When an abnormality occurs, the tally indicator flashes to indicate a warning.
9.
PEAKING knob
Turning this knob clockwise adjusts the picture sharpness, and makes focusing easier. This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder.
10.
CONTRAST knob
Adjusts the contrast of the screen. This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder.
11.
BRIGHT knob
Adjusts the brightness of the screen. This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder.
12.
TALLY switch
Controls the tally indicator located on the front of the viewfinder.
HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is set to high.
OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.
LOW: The tally indicator brightness is set to low.
13.
ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch
Controls the zebra pattern display.
ON: Display a zebra pattern.
OFF: Do not display a zebra pattern.
14.
DISPLAY switch
ON: Display text information.
OFF: Do not display text information.
15.
MIRROR switch
The image display on the monitor screen becomes reversed horizontally or vertically when the viewfinder barrel is raised up or rotated.
L/R: Reverse the image horizontally.
OFF: Do not reverse the image.
B/T: Reverse the image vertically.
16.
Microphone holder
000
2. Preparation
Preparing a Power Supply
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and AC adaptors listed below.
For details on the battery charging procedure, refer to the battery charger operation manual.
[CAUTION]
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey the law in the relative area or country.
Note on using the battery pack
A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged.
Using AC Power
Using a Battery Pack
Mount an AC-DN2B/DN10 on the camcorder in the same way as a battery pack, then connect to the AC power supply.
Press the battery pack against the back of the camcorder, aligning the line on the side of the battery pack with the line on the camcorder. Then slide the battery pack down until its “LOCK” arrow aligns with the line on the camcorder.
To detach the battery pack, pull the battery pack up by holding the release button in.
[Notes]
ˎ If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the terminals may become damaged.
ˎ During recording and playback (while the ACCESS lamp on the right-side panel is lit in blue and the ACCESS lamp in the card slot section is lit in orange), be careful never to remove the battery pack.
Doing so may corrupt the data recorded on the card.
ˎ Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing the battery pack.
When a BP-L80S/FLX75 Battery Pack is used, the camcorder will operate continuously for approximately 200 minutes.
[WARNING]
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
[Note]
The battery pack operating time depends on the frequency of use of the battery pack, and the ambient temperature when used.
Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger suitable for each battery.
000
2. Preparation
Attaching a Viewfinder
This section describes the viewfinder supplied with the PXW-X400KC/PXW-X400KF models.
[CAUTION]
When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece lens facing the sun.
Direct sunlight can enter through the lens, be focused in the viewfinder and cause fire.
[Note]
A viewfinder is supplied with the PXW-X400KC/PXW-
X400KF models. A viewfinder for the PXW-X400 is available separately.
2
Couple the viewfinder connector to the VF connector (26-pin).
VF connector (26-pin)
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring switch on the rear panel of the viewfinder to B/T.
Lifting Up the Viewfinder Barrel and
Eyepiece
You can view the LCD screen inside the viewfinder or its mirrored image by lifting up the viewfinder barrel or the eyepiece.
1
Push the clip on the bottom to release and flip up the viewfinder barrel.
2
It locks at the 120-degree position.
Attaching the Supplied Viewfinder
Up
[Note]
When attaching the viewfinder, take note of the following points.
ˎ Be sure to the power off the camcorder before coupling the viewfinder connector to the camcorder’s VF connector (26-pin). If you make this connection when the camcorder power is on, the viewfinder may not function properly.
ˎ Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the camcorder’s VF connector (26-pin). If the coupling is loose, noise may appear on the video or the tally light may not operate properly.
1
[1] Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring, [2] attach the viewfinder to the viewfinder fitting shoe, and [3] tighten the viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring.
Slide stopper
You can detach the viewfinder by following the attaching procedure in reverse order. But, when detaching the viewfinder from the attachment shoe, pull up the stopper.
Adjusting the Viewfinder Position
To adjust the viewfinder left-right position, loosen the left-right positioning ring, and to adjust the front-back position, loosen the front-to-back positioning knob.
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob
Adjusting the Viewfinder Angle
You can adjust the angle of the viewfinder.
[2]
[1]
Left-to-right positioning ring
[3]
Reversing the display (image/text indication) vertically
The viewfinder can be rotated as much as 180 degrees toward the direction facing the subject.
When you do this, the picture and other information displayed in the viewfinder appear upside down.
To restore the normal display, set the MIRROR
1
2
Normally use it in the locked position.
Although you can open it farther from the lock position, you must return it to the closed position to lock it at the 120-degree position again.
000
2. Preparation: Attaching a Viewfinder
Detaching the Viewfinder Barrel/
Eyepiece
1
Push the clip on the bottom to release.
2
Flip up the viewfinder barrel.
3
Slide the knob on the top to the opposite side of the viewfinder barrel.
4
Detach the viewfinder barrel by horizontally sliding it.
Reversing the display (image/text indication) horizontally
By setting the MIRROR switch on the rear panel of the viewfinder to L/R, you can reverse the picture and other information displayed in the viewfinder horizontally.
Adjust the Diopter
Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the viewfinder image is sharpest.
Hex socket bolts
Attaching the BKW-401 Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket
By fitting an optional BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation
Bracket, you can rotate the viewfinder out of the way so that your right leg does not hit the viewfinder while you are carrying the camcorder.
1
Loosen the front-to-back viewfinder positioning levers and the front-to-back viewfinder positioning knobs, and then pull the viewfinder slide assembly forward.
Viewfinder slide assembly
3
Attach the BKW-401 with the supplied bolts.
Bolts supplied with the BKW-401
3
4
Diopter adjustment ring
You can also attach a commercially available protection filter, close-up lens, etc. that is 52 mm in diameter.
4
Adjust the front-to-back position so that the arm of the BKW-401 does not touch the handle when it is raised.
Adjust position so that arm does not touch handle
1
2
Adjusting the Screen
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the viewfinder screen with the controls shown below.
Outlines: Adjust using the PEAKING knob.
Contrast: Adjust using the CONTRAST knob.
Brightness: Adjust using the BRIGHT knob.
2
Using a 2.5 mm diameter hexagonal wrench, detach the viewfinder slide assembly.
000
2. Preparation
Using the Camcorder for the First Time
When using the camcorder for the first time, configure the following settings in the menu.
For details about menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Setting the Time Zone
Set the time zone for the region of use. The default value is “UTC Greenwich.”
1
Select Operation >Time Zone >Time Zone in the setup menu.
2
Select the time zone to use.
3
Turn the MENU knob to set the year, month, or day, and then press the knob.
4
Repeat steps
2
and
3
to set the remaining digits.
5
Press the SET button.
The internal clock is set to the date set in steps
2
to
4
.
Next, set the time.
6
Select Maintenance >Clock Set >Time in the setup menu.
The Time screen appears.
Setting the Date and Time of the
Internal Clock
Set the year, month, day, and day-of-week of the internal clock.
1
Select Maintenance >Clock Set >Date in the setup menu.
The Date screen appears.
7
Set the time in the same way as when setting the date.
8
Press the SET button.
The time is registered in the internal clock.
To cancel the setting, press the Cancel button.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select the year, month, or day, and then press the knob.
The selected year, month, or day becomes editable.
000
2. Preparation
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens
[Note]
When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable to this connector, power off the camcorder first.
Attaching the Lens
This section describes how to attach the lens supplied with the PXW-X400KF as an example.
1
Push the lens locking lever up and remove the lens mount cap from the lens mount.
2
Align the center pin on the lens with the center slot in the lens mount, and insert the lens into the mount.
2
1
1
3
Holding the lens in place, push the lens locking lever down to lock the lens.
[Caution]
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off while the camcorder is being used. This could cause a serious accident. Make sure the lens is firmly locked. It is recommended that the lens mount securing rubber be put on the lens locking lever as illustrated below.
Lens mount securing rubber
3
When carrying out the adjustment, use a flange focal length adjustment chart as the subject.
Approx. 3 m (10 ft.)
4
Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector.
5
Secure the lens cable with the cable clamp.
If an aberration correction lens is attached
The aberration correction function is activated automatically.
1) Starting the camcorder with an aberration correction lens may require more time than normal because of data loading at start-up.
The lens supplied with the PXW-X400 is an aberration correction lens. Contact a Sony sales or service representative for information about other aberration correction lenses.
1) The aberration correction function does not operate if
Maintenance >Camera Config >ALAC in the setup menu is set to Off.
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length
If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you zoom from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the flange focal length (the distance from the plane of the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane, also called flange-back).
Make this adjustment just one time after mounting or changing the lens.
[Notes]
ˎ If you use a subject with insufficient contrast, or move the camcorder or subject during adjustment, this will cause an adjustment error.
ˎ Place the subject (the flange focal length adjustment chart) so that it appears at the center of the screen at the telephoto end. Arrange it so that no nearby object (no object closer to the camera than the chart) enters the screen at the wide-angle end.
Adjusting the flange focal length on the lens supplied with the PXW-X400KC
1
Place a subject (Siemens star chart, for example) 3 m (10 ft) in front of the camera.
2
Open the iris.
The depth-of-field is reduced when the iris is open, making adjustment easier.
3
Set the lens zoom to T (telephoto).
4
Adjust the focus on the subject.
5
Set the lens zoom to W (wide angle).
6
Loosen the F.B. lock screw on the lens, and turn the F.B. adjustment ring to adjust the focus.
7
Repeat steps
3
to
6
until the proper focus is achieved at both ends of the zoom ring.
8
When the optimum position of the F.B. adjustment ring is achieved, tighten the F.B. lock screw.
Adjusting the flange focal length on the lens supplied with the PXW-X400KF
With an auto focus lens, zoom and focus operations automatically adjust the flange focal length.
1
Place the supplied focal length adjustment chart about 3m (10 ft) in front of the camera.
2
Open the iris.
The depth-of-field is reduced when the iris is open, making adjustment easier.
3
Set the ZOOM switch to SERVO (power zoom mode).
4
Hold down the flange focal length adjustment button for 3 seconds.
The following message appears on the viewfinder screen.
Auto FB Adjust
Executing...
After successful adjustment, the message on the viewfinder screen changes to the following.
Auto FB Adjust
OK
If the flange focal length adjustment is not successful
Check the subject and lighting conditions, and repeat the adjustment.
000
2. Preparation: Mounting and Adjusting the Lens
Adjusting the flange focal length on manual lenses other than the PXW-X400KC/PXW-X400KF
1
Set the iris to manual.
2
Place a subject (Siemens star chart, for example) 3 m (10 ft) in front of the camera.
3
Open the iris.
The depth-of-field is reduced when the iris is open, making adjustment easier.
4
Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or F.B ring
(flange focal length adjustment ring).
5
Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to telephoto.
6
Point the camcorder at the chart by turning the focus ring and focus on it.
7
Set the zoom ring to wide angle.
8
Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart is in focus, being careful not to disturb the focus ring.
9
Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the chart stays in focus all the way from wide angle to telephoto.
10
Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing screws.
000
2. Preparation
Preparing the Audio Input System
Connecting a Microphone to the MIC
IN Connector
Attach the supplied microphone to the microphone holder of the supplied viewfinder.
1
Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder clamp.
Microphone holder clamp
On how to attach the microphone, refer to the operation manual for the microphone.
3
Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector, then set the AUDIO IN switch for the channel on which you want to record the audio from this microphone to FRONT.
Attaching a Wireless Receiver
can be switched on/off using Maintenance >Audio
>Rear XLR Auto in the setup menu.
[4]
To use a Sony wireless microphone system, power the camcorder off and then attach a wireless receiver.
ˎ DWR-S02D Digital Wireless Receiver
ˎ
Unit
For details about attaching a wireless receiver, refer to the instruction manual of each product.
[1] [2]
[3]
[1] Place the microphone in the holder so that
“UP” is at the top.
[2] Close the microphone holder.
[3] Tighten the screw.
[2]
[1]
[1]
2
Place the microphone in the microphone holder.
[1] Place the microphone in the holder so that
“UP” is at the top.
[2] Close the microphone holder.
[3] Tighten the screw.
[2] [3]
4
Secure the microphone cable with the cable clamp.
Connecting Microphones to the
AUDIO IN Connectors
You can connect up to two monaural microphones to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors, using an optional CAC-12 Microphone
Holder.
Supported microphones: ECM-674/678 electret condenser microphone
For details about attaching the microphone holder and microphone, refer to the instruction manual of each product.
Connecting Line Input Audio
Equipment
1
Connect the audio output connector of the audio equipment that supplies the line input signal to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector.
2
Set the AUDIO IN selector for the channel to which the audio signal source is connected to
LINE.
XLR connection automatic detect function
ˎ With the XLR connection automatic detection function switched off (the factory default setting): Set the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 switch to REAR for the channels to which the audio
ˎ equipment is connected.
ˎ With the XLR connection automatic detection function switched on: When a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector, the input from that connector is automatically selected for audio recording, regardless of the setting of the AUDIO IN CH1/
CH2 switch.
The XLR connection automatic detection function
000
2. Preparation
Attaching and Adjusting Peripheral Devices
Mounting on a Tripod
1
Attach the optional VCT-14/U14 Tripod
Adaptor to the tripod.
2
Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.
[Note]
The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position even after the camcorder is removed. If this happens, press the red button and move the lever as shown above until the pin returns to the stowed position. If the pin remains in the engaged position, you will not be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.
Attaching the Shoulder Strap
1
Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap fitting.
Pull up the strap to lock the fitting.
Connecting a Video Light
Slide the camcorder forward along the groove in the adaptor until it clicks.
3
Make sure that the camcorder is securely attached by moving it back and forth.
To remove the camcorder from the tripod attachment, hold down the red button and pull the lever in the direction of the arrow.
Red button
Lever
With this camcorder, you can use the Anton Bauer
Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light (powered by
12 V with maximum power consumption of 50 W).
ˎ connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT switch to AUTO, you can turn the light on and off automatically as you start and stop recording on this camcorder.
ˎ The output of the LIGHT connector on the camcorder is regulated to 12 V even when the camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power
(through the DC IN connector or battery pack).
The brightness or color temperature of the light will not change in response to voltage increase.
[Notes]
ˎ Do not connect video lights with power consumption of
50 W or greater.
ˎ The brightness or color temperature of the light will change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN connector or from the battery pack) is less than 12 V.
Clip
2
Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap fitting on the other side of the grip in the same way.
To remove the shoulder strap, refer to the following diagram.
Press here and pull in the direction shown by the arrow to release.
To attach a video light, fit the video light to the accessory shoe on the camcorder grip, and connect the video light cable to the LIGHT connector.
[Note]
The accessory shoe on the camcorder is of the 1/4-inch tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with a slide-type shoe, use the supplied cold shoe kit.
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position
You can slide the shoulder pad back and forth within a 40 mm range. This adjustment helps you get the best balance for shooting with the camcorder on your shoulder.
1,3
2
Shoulder pad
1
Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder pad.
2
Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is in the most convenient position.
3
Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the selected position.
000
2. Preparation
Handling SxS Memory Cards
This camcorder records video and audio on SxS memory cards (not supplied) loaded into one or both of its memory card slots.
You can use the camcorder with the following devices to make recordings.
ˎ supported) or QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard
Adaptor
Slot A
Slot B
Indicator
Lights in green
Not lit
Slot status
Standby (the loaded SxS memory card is ready for recording or playback)
No SxS memory card is loaded.
An unusable card is loaded.
An SxS memory card is loaded, but the other slot is selected.
About SxS Memory Cards
SxS memory cards
Use Sony SxS memory cards (SxS PRO or SxS-1) with this camcorder.
SxS PRO+ series
SxS PRO series
SxS-1 series
The memory cards listed above comply with the
ExpressCard memory card standard.
ˎ
Corporation.
ˎ The ExpressCard label and logo are the property of the Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association (PCMCIA) and are licensed to Sony Corporation. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective owners.
[Note]
Make sure to insert the SxS card in the correct orientation. Hold the card with the arrow on one side facing the direction shown in the diagram, and then insert the card.
The ACCESS indicator lights in orange, and then lights in green to indicate that the memory card is usable.
3
Close the cover.
ACCESS indicator status
Card slots A and B each have an ACCESS indicator that indicate the slot status.
Slot A access indicator
Slot B access indicator
Inserting SxS Memory Cards
1
Slide the cover to the left to open.
2
Insert an SxS memory card into a card slot.
Indicator
Lights in orange
Slot status
Accessing the SxS memory card
(lights during data reading and writing)
Ejecting SxS Memory Cards
1
Open the cover, and then press the EJECT button to release the lock and extract the button.
Press the button once to release the lock.
2
Press the EJECT button again to eject the card.
[Note]
When you press the EJECT button, take care not to impede the SxS memory card. If the movement of the SxS memory card is impeded, the lock may fail to release.
[Note]
Data integrity cannot be guaranteed if you power the camcorder off or remove a memory card while the card is being accessed. All data recorded on the card may be discarded. Always make sure that the ACCESS indicator is lit green or not lit before you power the camcorder off or remove a memory card.
Selecting the SxS Memory Card to
Use
When SxS memory cards are loaded in both slot A and slot B, you can press the SLOT SELECT button to select the SxS memory card to use.
When the remaining recording time on the recording SxS memory card falls below 60 seconds, the remaining capacity indicator for the corresponding media slot flashes on the viewfinder screen to indicate that the camcorder will switch SxS memory cards soon.
Subsequently, the camcorder switches automatically to the other card when the selected card becomes full, and recording continues.
000
2. Preparation: Handling SxS Memory Cards
[Note]
The SLOT SELECT button is disabled during playback. The memory cards are not switched even if you press the button.
Button operations are enabled when a thumbnail screen
Formatting (Initializing) SxS Memory
Cards
When an unformatted SxS memory card or an SxS memory card formatted in another specification is inserted, a message notifying you that the media has a different file system appears. In this case, format the memory card in the following way.
SxS memory cards are formatted in exFAT mode or
FAT mode by factory default.
[Note]
SxS memory cards must be formatted on an XDCAM device that supports the exFAT or UDF file system or on this camcorder. Cards in other formats cannot be used.
1
Select Operation >Format Media in the setup menu.
2
Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B).
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to format the card appears.
4
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is displayed, and the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
If formatting fails
A format operation may fail because the SxS memory card is write protected, or because it is not the type of card specified for use with this camcorder.
In this case, an error message appears. Follow the instructions in the error message and exchange the card for an SxS memory card that can be used with this camcorder.
[Notes]
ˎ Formatting a memory card erases all data, including recorded video data and setup files.
ˎ Use the format function of this camcorder to format SxS memory cards for use on this camcorder. The formats of cards formatted on other devices are not recognized as valid formats, making it necessary to format them again on this camcorder.
time of the two memory cards falls to five minutes during recording.
Exchange one of the cards for media with available recording capacity.
ˎ If you continue recording, the message “Media
Full” appears and recording stops when the total remaining recording time falls to 0.
[Note]
About up to 600 clips can be recorded on one SxS memory card.
The display of remaining recording time changes to “0” and the message “Media Full” appears when the clip limit is reached.
Restoring SxS Memory Cards
Checking the Remaining Recording
Time
You can check the remaining capacity of the SxS memory cards loaded in the two slots by checking the recording media remaining capacity indicator in the viewfinder.
The remaining recording time is calculated from the remaining capacity of the media in each slot and the current video format (recording bit rate), and is displayed in units of minutes.
You can check the remaining capacity on a bar graph by displaying the Media Status screen
[Note]
A mark appears when a memory card is write protected.
When to exchange SxS memory cards
ˎ The warning message “Media Near Full” appears, the WARNING indicator and the REC indication on the viewfinder screen flash, and the buzzer sounds when the total remaining recording
If for any reason an error should occur in a memory card, the card must be restored before use.
When you load an SxS memory card that needs to be restored, a message appears in the viewfinder to ask whether you want to restore it.
To execute the restore, turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], and then press the knob.
The restoration starts.
During restoration, a message is displayed, and the
ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When restoration ends, a completion message appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
If restoration fails
ˎ Write protected SxS memory cards and cards on which memory errors have occurred cannot be restored. A warning message appears for such cards. Follow the instructions in the message and unprotect the card or replace it with
ˎ another card.
ˎ SxS memory cards on which memory errors have occurred may become usable if they are reformatted.
ˎ In some cases, some clips can be restored while others cannot. The restored clips can be played normally.
ˎ If the message “Could not Restore Some Clips” keeps appearing after repeated attempts at restoration, it may be possible to restore the SxS memory card with the following procedure.
[1]
Use the application software (page 136)
to copy the required clips to another SxS memory card.
[2] Format the unusable SxS memory card on the camcorder.
[3] Copy the required clips back to the newly formatted SxS memory card.
000
2. Preparation
Handling SD Cards for Saving Configuration Data
The following SD cards can be used for saving configuration data.
SDHC memory cards* (Speed Class: 4 to 10, non-
UHS, Capacity: 4 to 32 GB)
* Referred to as “SD cards” in this manual.
Checking the Remaining Capacity
You can check the remaining capacity on an SD
card on the Media Status screen (page 14).
To use an SD card formatted on the camcorder in the slot of another device, make a backup of the card, then reformat the card in the device to be used.
Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards
SD cards must be formatted the first time they are used in the camcorder.
SD cards for use in the camcorder should be formatted using the format function of the camcorder. If a message appears when the SD card is inserted into the camcorder, format the SD card.
1
Select Operation >Format Media >SD Card
(Utility) in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to format the card appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is displayed, and the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
[Note]
Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card. The card cannot be restored.
000
2. Preparation
Using a Media Adaptor
[Notes]
ˎ For professional applications, the use of other media will not provide the same high reliability and durability that is obtained using SxS memory cards.
ˎ Not all memory cards are guaranteed to work with this camcorder. For compatible memory cards, contact your
Sony dealer.
XQD Memory Cards
By using an optional QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard
Adaptor, you can insert an XQD memory card into the SxS memory card slot and use it instead of an
SxS memory card.
For details about using a QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adaptor, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the adaptor.
[Notes]
ˎ High-speed playback may not be properly achieved with an XQD memory card.
ˎ Slow motion recording using the Slow & Quick Motion recording function cannot be used with an XQD memory card.
Formatting (initializing)
XQD memory cards must be formatted the first time they are used in the camcorder.
XQD memory cards for use in the camcorder should be formatted using the format function of the camcorder. If a message appears when the
XQD memory card is inserted into the camcorder, format the XQD memory card.
If an unformatted XQD memory card or an XQD memory card that was formatted in a different specification is inserted, a message asking for confirmation to format media or a message notifying you that the media has a different file system appears.
1
Select Operation >Format Media in the setup menu.
2
Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B).
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to format the card appears.
4
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is displayed, and the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
[Note]
Formatting an XQD memory card erases all data on the card, including protected video. The data cannot be restored.
Connection between the camcorder and a computer
Insert the recorded XQD memory card into a slot in the camcorder, and connect the camcorder to a computer using a USB cable.
To use a memory card formatted on the camcorder in the slot of another device
First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the card in the device to be used.
SDXC Cards
By using an optional MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor, you can insert an SDXC card into an SxS memory card slot and use it instead of an SxS memory card for recording and playback.
[Note]
Do not use SDXC cards at the same time as other memory cards. If a mix of cards are used at the same time, the camcorder cannot switch cards when the media becomes full.
The following SDXC cards are supported.
SDXC memory cards (SD speed class: Class 10)
For details about using an MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the adaptor.
[Notes]
ˎ High-speed playback may not be properly achieved with an SDXC card.
ˎ Slow motion recording using the Slow & Quick Motion recording function cannot be used with an SDXC card.
Formatting (initializing)
SDXC cards must be formatted the first time they are used in the camcorder.
SDXC cards for use in the camcorder should be formatted using the format function of the camcorder. If a message appears when the SDXC card is inserted into the camcorder, format the
SDXC card.
If an unformatted SDXC card or an SDXC card that was formatted in a different specification is inserted, a message asking for confirmation to format media or a message notifying you that the media has a different file system appears.
Format the card using the following procedure.
1
Select Operation >Format Media in the setup menu.
2
Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B).
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to format the card appears.
4
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is displayed, and the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
[Note]
Formatting an SDXC card erases all data on the card, including protected video. The data cannot be restored.
Connection between the camcorder and a computer
Insert the recorded SDXC card into a slot in the camcorder, and connect the camcorder to a computer using a USB cable.
To use a memory card formatted on the camcorder in the slot of another device
First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the card in the device to be used.
XQD is a registered trademark of Sony
Corporation.
000
3. Settings and Adjustments
Format Settings
You can set the recording mode, system frequency, and video format using Operation >Format in the setup menu.
For details about menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 83).
Selecting the Recording Mode
You can select exFAT or UDF recording mode.
1
Select Operation >Format >File System in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select exFAT or UDF, and press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Select [Execute] to execute, or select [Cancel] to cancel, and then press the MENU knob.
The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing [Execute].
[Note]
The recording mode cannot be changed during recording/playback or while the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Switching the System Frequency
You can switch the system frequency as required.
[Notes]
ˎ The system frequency cannot be changed during recording/playback or while the thumbnail screen is displayed.
ˎ After switching between 29.97 and 59.94 or between 25 and 40, the camcorder does not reboot automatically.
1
Select Operation >Format >Frequency in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select the system frequency, and press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Select [Execute] to execute, or select [Cancel] to cancel, and then press the MENU knob.
The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing [Execute].
Switching the Video Format
Refer to “Video Formats” (page 33) as required when switching the video format.
1
Select Operation >Format >Rec Format in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to change the video format, and press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Select [Execute] to execute, or select [Cancel] to cancel, and then press the MENU knob.
Video Formats
The following recording formats can be selected for different combinations of video resolution and system frequency.
Picture size System frequency Video format
(Operation >Format >Rec Format in setup menu)
59.94/50 XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
XAVC-I 1280×720P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080i
XAVC-L 25 1080i
HD422 50 1080i
a)
HD422 50 720P
a)
HQ 1920×1080i
a)
HQ 1440×1080i a)
HQ 1280×720P
a)
MPEG IMX 50
a)
DVCAM
a)
1920×1080
1280×720
1920×1080
1920×1080
1280×720
1920×1080
1920×1080
1280×720
1920×1080
1440×1080
1280×720
720×486/720×576
720×480/720×576
000
3. Settings and Adjustments: Format Settings
System frequency Video format
(Operation >Format >Rec Format in setup menu)
29.97/25/23.98
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P a)
HD422 50 720P a)
HQ 1920×1080P
a) a) exFAT and UDF files systems are supported. Only exFAT is supported for other options.
Picture size
1920×1080
1920×1080
1280×720
1920×1080
SDI OUT Connector and HDMI Output Connector Output Formats
The signals that can be output from the SDI OUT connector and HDMI output connector are shown in the following table according to the Operation >Format setting in the setup menu.
Operation menu
Format
Frequency Rec Format (codec omitted)
59.94
29.97
1920×1080P
1920×1080i
1440×1080i
1280×720P
720×480i
1920×1080P
1280×720P
Input/Output
Output Format
SDI
1920×1080P (Level A)
1920×1080P (Level B)
1920×1080i
720×486i
1920×1080i
720×486i
1920×1080i
720×486i
a)
1280×720P
720×486i
720×486i
No signal
1920×1080PsF
720×486i
1280×720P
720×486i
HDMI
1920×1080P
No signal
1920×1080i
720×480i
1920×1080i
720×480i
1920×1080i
720×480i
a)
1280×720P
720×480i
720×480i
720×480P
1920×1080i
720×480i
1280×720P
720×480i
Operation menu
Format
Frequency
23.98
50
25
Rec Format (codec omitted)
1920×1080P
1280×720P
1920×1080P
1920×1080i
1440×1080i
1280×720P
720×576i
1920×1080P
1280×720P
Input/Output
Output Format
SDI
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080i (2-3PD)
720×486i (2-3PD)
1280×720P (2-3PD)
720×486i (2-3PD)
1920×1080P (Level A)
1920×1080P (Level B)
1920×1080i
720×576i
1920×1080i
720×576i
1920×1080i
720×576i
a)
1280×720P
720×576i
720×576i
No signal
1920×1080PsF
720×576i
1280×720P
720×576i a) Not supported when proxy recording and wireless LAN connection function is on.
HDMI
No signal
1920×1080i (2-3PD)
720×480i (2-3PD)
1280×720P (2-3PD)
720×480i (2-3PD)
1920×1080P
No signal
1920×1080i
720×576i
1920×1080i
720×576i
1920×1080i
720×576i
a)
1280×720P
720×576i
720×576i
720×576P
1920×1080i
720×576i
1280×720P
720×576i
000
3. Settings and Adjustments: Format Settings
VIDEO Connector Output Formats
The signals that can be output from the VIDEO connector are shown in the following table according to the Operation >Format setting in the setup menu.
VIDEO OUT signal format Operation menu
Format
Frequency Rec Format (codec omitted)
59.94
29.97
23.98
1920×1080P
1920×1080i
1440×1080i
1280×720P
720×480i
1920×1080P
1280×720P
1920×1080P
1280×720P
Proxy recording/Wireless LAN connection function
OFF ON
HD Y HD Y
HD Y
HD Y
Composite
HD Y
HD Y
HD Y
Composite
HD Y
d)
Composite
HD Y
Composite
HD Sync
a)
Composite
Composite
Composite
HD Y
Composite
HD Y
–
HD Sync
HD Y
HD Y
a)
Composite
Composite
d)
d)
d)
Composite
HD Y
b)
Composite
HD Y
HD Y/HD Sync
Composite
HD Y b)
Composite
Composite d)
HD Y
b)
Composite d)
HD Y
HD Y
Composite
HD Y
b)
Composite
d)
d)
Operation menu
Format
Frequency Rec Format (codec omitted)
VIDEO OUT signal format
50
25
1920×1080P
1920×1080i
1440×1080i
1280×720P
720×576i
1920×1080P
1280×720P
Proxy recording/Wireless LAN connection function
OFF ON
HD Y
HD Y
HD Y
HD Y
HD Y
HD Y
Composite
HD Y
Composite d)
HD Y
Composite
HD Y
Composite d)
Composite
HD Sync
a)
HD Y
–
HD Sync
a)
Composite
Composite
Composite d)
Composite
d)
Composite
HD Y
Composite
HD Y
b)
Composite
HD Y
HD Y
Composite d)
HD Y
b)
Composite d) a) 1080i sync signal output.
b) 1080PsF sync signal output.
c) Switches to 1920×1080i when proxy recording or wireless LAN connection function is on.
d) Character information (superimposed) turns on/off in sync with the SDI OUT2/HDMI character information display switching.
000
3. Settings and Adjustments
Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance
To ensure excellent image quality when using this camcorder, conditions may require that both the black balance and the white balance be adjusted.
Black balance and white balance adjustment values that are automatically set by the camcorder and the various settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained even when the power is turned off.
Adjusting the Black Balance
The black balance will require adjustment in the following cases.
ˎ
ˎ When the camcorder has not been used for a long time
ˎ When the camcorder is used under conditions in which the surrounding temperature has
ˎ changed greatly
ˎ When the GAIN selector (L/M/H/Turbo) values have been changed with Operation >Gain
Switch in the setup menu.
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when using the camcorder after it has been off.
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are performed in the following order: black set and black balance. Manual black balance adjustment can be selected from the setup menu.
execution, and changes to “OK” when the adjustment finishes.
Adjustment values are saved to memory automatically.
[Notes]
ˎ During the black balance adjustment, the iris is automatically closed.
ˎ During the black balance adjustment, the gain selection circuit is automatically activated so you may see flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not a fault.
If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be made
If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed normally, an error message will appear for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen.
Error message
NG: Iris not Closed
NG: Timeout
Meaning
The lens iris did not close; adjustment was impossible.
Adjustment could not be completed within the standard number of attempts.
If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the black balance adjustment.
If the error message occurs again, an internal check is necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to the
Maintenance Manual.
[Note]
If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris. If this happens, the black balance will be incorrect.
1
Set the switches and selectors as shown below.
ˎ GAIN switch: L (set to a gain value that is as small as possible)
ˎ OUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM
ˎ WHITE BAL switch: A or B
1)
1) Adjustment values are saved to memory B only when
Operation >White Setting >White Switch<B> in the setup menu is set to Memory.
2
Set the FILTER knob to suit the lighting conditions as follows.
3
Place a white test card under the same lighting conditions as the subject to be shot and zoom in on it.
Alternatively, any white object such as a cloth or a wall can be used.
The absolute minimum white area is as follows.
Rectangle centered on the screen
The lengths of the sides are 70% of the length and width of the screen. 10% or more of the surface area of the image within the rectangular area must be white.
Automatic black balance adjustment is disabled in the following cases.
ˎ
ˎ During special recording modes
ˎ
1
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.
2
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLACK and release the switch.
The message “Executing…” appears during
Adjusting the White Balance
Always readjust the white balance when the lighting conditions change.
[Note]
Make sure there are no bright spots in the rectangle.
4
Adjust the lens iris.
Iris adjusted manually: Set the iris to an appropriate setting.
Iris adjusted using auto iris: Set the automatic/ manual switch on the lens to automatic.
5
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to WHITE and then release the switch.
The message “Executing…” appears during execution, and changes to “OK: (color temperature of subject)” when the adjustment finishes.
The adjustment values are saved automatically in the memory selected in step
1
(A or B).
[Note]
The iris may hunt 1) during the adjustment. To prevent this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as IG, IS, or S) on the lens.
1) Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of the image, resulting from repeated response to automatic iris control.
For details, refer to the lens operation manual.
If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot be made
If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed normally, an error message will appear for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen.
Error message
NG: Low Light
NG: High Light
NG: Color Temp.
High
NG: Color Temp.
Low
Meaning
The white video level is too low. Either open the lens iris or increase the gain.
The white video level is too high. Either stop down the lens iris or change the ND filter.
The color temperature of the subject lighting is too high, and could not be adjusted.
Adjust the color temperature of the lighting, then update memory.
The color temperature of the subject lighting is too low, and could not be adjusted. Adjust the color temperature of the lighting, then update memory.
000
3. Settings and Adjustments: Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance
Error message Meaning
NG: Out of Range Value could not be adjusted because the difference between the current value and reference value exceeds the adjustment range.
NG: Poor White
Area
The white surface of the subject is too narrow, and could not be adjusted.
NG: Timeout Adjustment could not be completed within the standard number of attempts.
Adjustment could not be completed within the specified time.
If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the white balance adjustment. If the error message occurs again, an internal check is necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to the
Maintenance Manual.
If you have no time to adjust the white balance
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
Changing the color temperature when the ND filter is switched
You can assign electrical CC (color correction)
filters to ND filters (page 5) allowing you to
change the color temperature automatically when the ND filter is switched.
1
Set Maintenance >White Filter >ND Filter C.
Temp to On in the setup menu (page 104).
2
To assign an electrical CC filter to FILTER knob position number 1, select [ND FLT C.
Temp<1>]. To assign it to positions 2 to 4, select [ND FLT C.Temp<2-4>].
3
Turn the MENU knob to select the desired color temperature.
4
Repeat steps
2
and
3
as required.
Switching electrical CC filters with an assignable switch
You can assign the function that switches between electrical CC filters to an assignable switch. This allows you to switch between color temperatures
(3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) that have been assigned using up to four positions (A to D) with each press of the assignable switch.
Regardless of assignments to assignable switches, you can also switch between the color temperatures assigned to each position from a
RM-B150/B170/B750 Remote Control Unit.
1
Select Maintenance >White Filter in the setup menu.
2
Select the position to which to assign a CC filter by selecting one of [Electrical CC<A>] to
[Electrical CC <D>], and then turn the MENU knob to select the desired color temperature.
Select “-----” with Electrical CC <C> or <D> selected.
When the assignable switch is pressed, the setting for that position is not displayed. For example, if “-----” is set for one position, then switching between the remaining three positions is carried out.
3
Repeat step
2
as required.
4
Assign the electrical CC filter switching function (ELECTRICAL CC) to an assignable
White balance memory
Values stored in memory are held until the white balance is next adjusted, even if the camcorder power is turned off.
The camcorder has two white balance memories,
A and B. You can automatically save adjustment values for each ND filter in the memory that corresponds to the WHITE BAL switch setting (A or B). The camcorder has four built-in ND filters, allowing you to save a total of eight adjustment values (4×2). However, the contents of the memories are not linked to ND filter settings in the following cases.
ˎ When the number of memories allocated to each of A and B is limited to one by setting
Operation >White Setting >Filter White Memory in the setup menu to Off.
ˎ When the electrical CC filter switching function has been assigned to an assignable switch, or when a remote control unit has been connected. (In these cases, the contents of white balance memory are linked to electrical
CC filter positions (A to D).)
Also, when Operation >White Setting >White
Switch<B> in the setup menu is set to [ATW
(Auto Tracing White Balance)], and the WHITE BAL switch is set to B, the ATW function is activated to automatically adjust the white balance of the picture being shot for varying lighting conditions.
000
3. Settings and Adjustments
Setting the Electronic Shutter
Shutter Modes
The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are listed below.
Standard mode
Select this mode for shooting fast-moving subjects with little blurring.
You can set the shutter speed in one of two shutter modes: Speed mode, in which the speed is set in seconds, and Angle mode, in which the speed is set in degrees.
Speed mode
System frequency
59.94i
59.94P
50i
50P
29.97P
Shutter speed (unit: seconds)
1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000
25P
23.98P
1/40
a)
, 1/50
a)
, 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
1/33
a)
, 1/50
a)
, 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
1/32
a)
, 1/48
a)
, 1/50
a)
, 1/60, 1/96, 1/100,
1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,
1/2000 a) This speed cannot be selected when the camcorder is in
Slow & Quick Motion mode and Operation >Rec Function
>Frame Rate in the setup menu is set to a value that is greater than the system frequency.
Angle mode
180°, 90°, 45°, 22.5°, 11.25°
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode
Select this mode for obtaining images with no horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects such as monitor screens.
As shown in the following tables, the range of shutter speeds that can be set varies depending on whether the Slow & Quick Motion (S&Q) function is on or off.
System frequency
59.94i
59.94P
29.97P
23.98P
50i
50P
25P
Shutter speed (unit: Hz)
S&Q: Off S&Q: On
60.00 to 7000
60.00 to 8000
—
60.00 to 8000
30.00 to 8000
23.99 to 6000
50.00 to 7000
50.00 to 7000
25.02 to 7000
30.00 to 8000
30.03 to 6000
—
50.00 to 7000
30.00 to 7000
SLS (slow speed shutter) mode
This mode is used to shoot subjects with low illumination. The number of accumulated frames shot when using the slow speed shutter function can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16 using Operation
>Slow Shutter >Number of Frames in the setup menu.
[Notes]
ˎ SLS mode cannot be used when the camcorder is in Slow
& Quick Motion mode.
ˎ It is not possible to turn the SLS mode on or off, or change the number of accumulated frames when recording.
Switching between Speed mode and Angle mode
1
Select Operation >Shutter >Mode in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Speed] or
[Angle], and then press the knob.
Setting the shutter mode and shutter speed
(standard mode)
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained even when the camcorder power is turned off.
1
Push the SHUTTER switch from ON to SELECT.
The current shutter setting indication appears in the viewfinder for about three seconds.
2
Before the shutter setting in step
1
disappears, push the SHUTTER switch down to SELECT again. Repeat this step until the desired mode or speed appears.
When all modes and speeds are displayed, the display changes in the following order.
Speed Mode (with system frequency 59.94i)
Setting the Shutter Mode and Shutter
Speed
ECS Mode
[Note]
Depending on the frame rate setting (page 49), some
shutter speeds cannot be selected in Slow & Quick Motion mode. These speeds are replaced by the slowest selectable shutter speed.
[Notes]
ˎ When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as the shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of field.
ˎ The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on the current system frequency.
Example: If you perform Slow & Quick Motion shooting with the frame rate set to 60 and the video format to HQ1280/29.97P:
The shutter speed is indicated as follows.
ˎ
1/401/501/601/100…
ˎ Slow & Quick Motion mode: On
1/601/601/601/100…
Setting the shutter speed (ECS mode)
1
Set the shutter mode to ECS (see the previous item).
2
Turn the MENU knob to select the desired frequency or number of frames.
Setting the shutter speed (SLS mode)
1
Select Operation >Slow Shutter >Setting in the setup menu and set the shutter mode to On.
2
Select Operation >Slow Shutter >Number of
Frames in the setup menu and select the desired number of frames.
000
3. Settings and Adjustments
Setting Auto Iris
The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be changed to aid the shooting of clear pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent blownout highlights.
Setting the Auto Iris Operating Mode
Set the operating mode used when adjusting levels using auto iris.
1
Select Operation >Auto Iris >Mode in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select the operating mode, then press the knob.
Description Operating mode
Backlight
Standard
Spotlight
Mode for shooting in backlight conditions
Standard mode
Mode for reducing blown out highlights when there are spotlights centered on a subject.
Set the target convergence level for auto iris
1
Select Operation >Auto Iris >Level in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select the level in the range –99 to +99, then press the knob.
Convergence level
–99
Description
±0
+99
Sets the iris 2 f-stops or more darker
Reference level
Sets the iris 2 f-stops or more lighter
Setting the auto iris speed
Set the operating speed when adjusting levels using auto iris.
1
Select Operation >Auto Iris >Speed in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select the speed in the range –99 (slowest) to +99 (fastest), then press the knob.
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the reference value.
[Note]
Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is not
ECS.
The current reference value is shown by the iris
position indicator (page 15) on the
viewfinder screen.
ˎ To open the iris slightly, turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camcorder.
Select one of +0.25, +0.5, +0.75, or +1.
ˎ To close the iris slightly, turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camcorder.
Select one of –0.25, –0.5, –0.75, or –1.
The changed reference value is retained until the power of the camcorder is turned off. Even if the reference value is changed, it reverts to the standard value every time the power is turned on.
The shaded parts indicate the area of light detection.
If you select Var, the following items become effective and you can set the window of the desired size. Set Operation >Auto Iris >Iris Var
Width, Iris Var Height, Iris Var, Iris Var H Position, and Iris Var V Position in the setup menu.
Item
Iris Var Width
Iris Var Height
Iris Var H
Position
Iris Var V
Position setting
The width of the window
The height of the window
The position of the window in the horizontal direction
The position of the window in the vertical direction.
When you exit the menu, the auto iris window selected in step
3
appears.
Unless you need to keep this window displayed, set Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window
Indication in the setup menu to Off.
Changing the Reference Value of the
Lens Iris
Setting the Auto Iris Detection
Window
Reducing the Effect of Bright
Highlights
The reference value for the lens iris can be set within the following range with respect to the standard value.
ˎ +0.25 to +1 (increments of 0.25): About 0.25 to 1 stop further open
ˎ –0.25 to –1 (increments of 0.25): About 0.25 to 1 stop further closed
Also you can set the area where light detection occurs.
1
Set Operation >Auto Iris >Iris Override in the setup menu to On.
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
1
Set Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window
Indication in the setup menu to On.
The current automatic iris window appears on the viewfinder screen.
If it is not necessary to display the auto iris window on the screen, set to Off.
2
Select Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window in the setup menu.
3
Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris window appears, and then press the knob.
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too much, leaving the overall image dark, a condition known as clipped blacks. In such cases, switching the clip highlight function on will clip the signal above a certain level, reducing the effects of the auto iris.
Set Operation >Auto Iris >Clip High Light in the setup menu to On.
000
3. Settings and Adjustments: Setting Auto Iris
Adjusting the Iris Gain on the Lens
Supplied with the PXW-X400KC
1
Set the iris mode switch to the A (auto) position.
2
Flip off the rubber cap of the iris gain adjustment trimmer.
3
Turn the iris gain adjustment trimmer using a screwdriver, or similar object, to adjust the gain.
Turn clockwise to increase the gain. Turn counterclockwise to decrease the gain.
Adjust while watching the iris ring on the lens body.
4
Reattach the rubber cap.
000
3. Settings and Adjustments
Adjusting the Focus
This section describes the focus adjustment when using the lens supplied with the PXW-X400KF.
[Note]
The lens is designed with an extra margin at the infinity position (∞), to compensate for focus drifting due to variations in temperature. When shooting a subject at infinity in MF or Full MF mode, check the picture in the viewfinder as you focus.
One-push Auto Focus
Press the PUSH AF button. The auto focus activates temporarily.
The one-push auto focus stops when the subject comes into focus.
Adjusting in Full MF Mode
MF Assist Function
When you slide the focus ring back (toward the camcorder), the focus mode is set to Full MF mode for full manual focus adjustment.
[Note]
When you slide the focus ring back, the focus instantly moves to the marker position.
Focus by turning the focus ring while viewing the viewfinder.
The distance indications on the ring are valid in
Full MF mode. The distances where the picture is in focus correspond to absolute positions of the focus ring.
Peaking
You can turn the PEAKING knob on the viewfinder to use the peaking function. Edges are emphasized in the monitor picture, which facilitates manual focusing.
The recorded video signals are not affected.
When the MF assist function is on (page 111),
auto focus is activated after you stop focusing using the focus ring and provides fine control adjustment of the focus of the subject in the center of the display (focus tracking).
When fine adjustment stops, the MF assist auto focus operation ends.
Adjusting in AF Mode
When you slide the focus ring forward and set the FOCUS switch to A (auto), the focus mode becomes AF mode, in which auto focus is available continuously.
The distance indications on the ring are invalid in
AF mode.
Using Macro Mode
Using the Focus Ring
Adjust the focus by turning the focus ring while viewing the viewfinder.
The distance indications on the ring are invalid in
MF mode.
When the focus mode is MF or AF, set the MACRO switch to the ON position to enable macro mode.
Macro mode allows you to adjust the focus over a range that includes the macro area.
Macro mode is disabled in Full MF mode.
000
3. Settings and Adjustments
Adjusting the Audio Level
When you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO, the input levels of analog audio signals recorded on each channel are adjusted automatically. You can also make manual adjustments.
[Note]
Even if you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO, the input levels of digital audio signals are not adjusted automatically.
Target Audio Level for Manual
Adjustment
Make adjustment using –20 dB as the target level.
If the audio level meter shows a maximum level of
0 dB, then it indicates that the input audio level is excessive.
Excessive input level
Target input level
Manually Adjusting the Audio Levels of the Audio Inputs from the AUDIO
IN CH-1/CH-2 Connectors
2
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) corresponding to the channel(s) selected in step
1
to MANUAL.
3
With the LEVEL knob(s) for the channel(s) selected in step 1, adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to –20 dB for a normal input volume.
Selecting the knob used for adjusting the recording level
In Maintenance >Audio in the setup menu, you can select which audio level control controls the audio recording level of the input to each of the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors. The correspondences between the settings of the menu items and the controls are as follows.
[Note]
If an AES/EBU digital audio signal is input, the recording level cannot be adjusted using the camcorder.
Rear1/WRR Level: Channel 1 recording level
Setting
Side1
Front
Front+Side1
Knob
LEVEL (CH1) knob
MIC LEVEL knob
LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC LEVEL knob (linked operation)
Rear2/WRR Level: Channel 2 recording level
Setting
Side2
Front
Front+Side2
Knob
LEVEL (CH2) knob
MIC LEVEL knob
LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC LEVEL knob (linked operation)
1
To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO IN
CH-1 or CH-2 connector, set the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 switch to REAR.
To adjust both input signals, set both switches to REAR.
[Note]
When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs and MIC LEVEL knob linked together, if the MIC LEVEL knob is set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position of the MIC LEVEL knob before adjusting the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs.
Manually Adjusting the Audio Level of the MIC IN Connector
1
Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switch(es) to FRONT.
2
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for the desired channel(s) selected in step
1
to
MANUAL.
3
Turn the MIC LEVEL knob, and adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to –20 dB for a normal input volume.
Selecting the knob used for adjusting the recording level
In Maintenance >Audio in the setup menu, you can select which audio level control controls the audio recording level of the front microphone input. The correspondences between the settings of the menu items and the controls are as follows.
MIC CH1 Level: Channel 1 recording level
Setting
Side1
Front
Front+Side1
Knob
LEVEL (CH1) knob
MIC LEVEL knob
LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC LEVEL knob (linked operation)
MIC CH2 Level: Channel 2 recording level
Setting
Side2
Front
Front+Side2
Knob
LEVEL (CH2) knob
MIC LEVEL knob
LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC LEVEL knob (linked operation)
[Note]
When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL knob and LEVEL
(CH1/CH2) knobs linked together, if the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs are set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position of the LEVEL (CH1/
CH2) knobs before adjusting the MIC LEVEL knob.
Recording Audio on Channels 3 and 4
1
Select the audio recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH3/CH4 switches.
CH3 switch
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
Channel 3 recording target
Front microphone audio
Audio signal input to AUDIO IN
CH1 connector
Wireless microphone audio
CH4 switch
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
Channel 4 recording target
Front microphone audio
Audio signal input to AUDIO IN
CH2 connector
Wireless microphone audio
2
To adjust automatically, set the AUDIO SELECT
CH 3-4 switch to AUTO.
To adjust manually, set the AUDIO SELECT CH
3-4 switch to MANUAL.
3
Select the knobs that adjust the audio levels with the Audio CH3 Level and Audio CH4 Level items under Maintenance >Audio in the setup menu.
Audio CH3 Level: Channel 3 recording level
Setting
Side3
Front
Knob
LEVEL (CH3) knob
MIC LEVEL knob
000
3. Settings and Adjustments: Adjusting the Audio Level
Setting Knob
Front+Side3 LEVEL (CH3) knob and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked operation)
Audio CH4 Level: Channel 4 recording level
Setting
Side4
Front
Knob
LEVEL (CH4) knob
MIC LEVEL knob
Front+Side4 LEVEL (CH4) knob and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked operation)
You can now adjust the levels of audio channels 3 and 4 with the knobs selected here.
000
3. Settings and Adjustments
Setting Time Data
Setting the Timecode
The timecode setting range is from 00:00:00:00 to
23:59:59:29 (hours:minutes:seconds:frames).
1
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch the display in the LCD monitor to status display.
2
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
3
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
PRESET.
4
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.
The first (leftmost) digit of the timecode flashes.
5
Use the up and down arrow buttons to change values, and use the left and right arrow buttons to move the flashing digit. Repeat until all digits are set.
To reset the value to 00:00:00:00, press the
RESET/RETURN button.
6
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or
R-RUN.
F-RUN: Free run (timecode generator keeps running)
R-RUN: Recording run (timecode generator runs only while recording)
[Note]
When picture cache mode is active, time data cannot be set by switching the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET. To set time data, turn picture cache mode off.
Switching between DF and NDF
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or non-drop frame (NDF) mode using Maintenance
>Timecode >DF/NDF in the setup menu.
To make the timecode consecutive
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to
R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on the media normally produces consecutive timecode.
However, once you remove the media and record on another media, the timecode will no longer be consecutive when you use the original media again for recording.
In this case, to make the timecode consecutive, set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN.
Saving the real time in the timecode
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode. The time of the camcorder internal clock is applied as the real time.
For details about adjusting the internal clock, see “Setting the
Date and Time of the Internal Clock” (page 24).
Setting the User Bits
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal digits), you can record user information such as the date, time, or scene number on the timecode track.
1
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch the display in the LCD monitor to status display.
2
Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.
3
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.
The first (leftmost) digit flashes.
4
Use the up and down arrow buttons to change values, and use the left and right arrow buttons to move the flashing digit. Repeat until all digits are set.
To reset the value to 00 00 00 00, press the
RESET/RETURN button.
5
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or
R-RUN, corresponding to the desired operating mode for the timecode generator.
User bit memory function
The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is automatically retained in memory even when the power is turned off.
Synchronizing the Timecode to an
External Source
You can synchronize the internal timecode generator of this camcorder with an external generator. You can also synchronize the timecode generators of other camcorders/VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder.
1
Connect both the reference video signal and the external timecode as illustrated below.
Example 1: Synchronizing with an external signal
[1] [2]
External timecode
Reference video signal
[1] GENLOCK IN connector
[2] TC IN connector
Example 2: Interconnecting a number of camcorders with one camcorder as reference
To next camcorder
[1] VIDEO OUT connector
[2] TC OUT connector
[3] TC IN connector
[4] GENLOCK IN connector
2
Turn on the POWER switch.
3
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
PRESET.
4
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN.
5
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
6
Supply a timecode signal and a reference video signal, complying with the SMPTE standard and in proper phase relationship, to the TC IN connector and to the GENLOCK IN connector, respectively.
This operation synchronizes the internal
000
3. Settings and Adjustments: Setting Time Data timecode generator with the external timecode. Once about ten seconds have elapsed after the timecode locks, the external lock state is maintained even if the external timecode source is disconnected.
To release the external synchronization, first stop the external timecode input, then set the
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.
[Notes]
ˎ When you finish the above procedure, the internal timecode is immediately synchronized with the external timecode and the time data display will show the value of the external timecode. However, wait for a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before recording.
ˎ If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the same as the system frequency of the camcorder, the camcorder cannot be correctly genlocked. If this occurs, the timecode will not acquire successful lock with the external timecode.
User bit settings during synchronization
When the timecode is synchronized to an external signal, only the time data is synchronized with the external timecode value.
Note on changing the power supply from the battery pack to an external power supply during external synchronization
To maintain a continuous power supply, connect the external power supply to the DC IN connector before removing the battery pack. You may lose timecode external synchronization if you remove the battery pack first.
Camcorder genlock during external synchronization
During external synchronization, the camcorder is genlocked to the reference video signal input from the GENLOCK IN connector.
000
4. Shooting
Basic Operations
This section explains the basic shooting and recording procedures.
Before starting to shoot, inspect the camera system to verify that it is operating properly.
1
Attach a fully charged battery pack
2
Load one or two SxS memory cards
If you load two cards, the camcorder switches automatically to the second card when the first card becomes full.
3
Set the camcorder’s POWER switch
4
Make the following settings.
Zoom: Auto
Camera output: Select the picture currently being shot (camera picture), and turn the
Timecode advance mode: F-RUN (Free Run) or
Audio input channel selection: Auto
5
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the BLACK position to adjust the black balance
6
Select a filter according to the lighting conditions, and adjust the white balance
7
Point the camcorder at the subject, and adjust the focus and zoom.
8
If you are using the electronic shutter, select an appropriate shutter mode and speed
9
Do one of the following to start recording.
– Press the REC START button (page 4).
– Press the VTR button on the lens.
– Turn on the assignable switch to which the
Rec function has been assigned (page 110).
During recording, the TALLY indicators, the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder, and the REC indicator on the viewfinder screen light. Adjust the zoom and focus as required.
[Notes]
ˎ Never remove the battery pack while the camcorder is recording (while the ACCESS indicator on the right-side panel is lit in blue and the ACCESS indicator in the card slot section is lit in orange). Doing so risks the loss of several seconds of data before the recording was interrupted, because internal
ˎ processing will not end normally.
ˎ The playback control buttons (EJECT, F REV, F FWD,
NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, STOP) do not function during recording.
10
To stop recording, perform one of the operations listed in step
9
.
The TALLY indicators, the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder, and the REC indicator on the viewfinder screen go out, and camcorder enters recording standby (Stby) mode.
A clip is created from the video and audio data and the metadata recorded between steps and
10
.
9
To review the recording (rec review)
With the camcorder in recording standby mode, press an assignable switch assigned with the Rec Review function to play back the last two seconds of the clip at normal speed.
Press and hold an assignable switch assigned with the Rec Review function for one second or longer to start play back from the frame two seconds prior to the last frame at four times speed in the reverse direction. Then, release the button to play the clip from that point at normal speed. The clip is played to the end, then Rec Review ends and the camcorder returns to Stby mode.
When the Rec Review function is assigned to the RET button on the lens, you can also conduct a review by using the RET button.
11
Repeat steps
9
and
10
to continue recording.
With each repetition, another clip is created on the memory card.
Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3
[Notes]
ˎ You cannot resume recording for about one second after stopping recording.
ˎ The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on one memory card is 600. Even if the memory card has enough free capacity to record more clips, when 600 clips have been recorded, no further recording is possible.
Clip names
Eight-character clips names (consisting of a four-character prefix and a four-digit number) are generated automatically for clips recorded by this camcorder.
Example: ABCD0001
You can also use Operation >Clip >Title Prefix in the setup menu to set the clip name prefix to a user-specified string of characters (four to
46 characters in length). (A user-specified prefix cannot be changed after recording.)
The four-digit number at the end of clip names is generated automatically, incrementing as clips are recorded.
Playing Recorded Clips
When the camcorder is in standby (Stby) mode, you can play all or part of the most recently
1
Insert the SxS memory card to play
2
Press the PREV button (page 8) or the F REV
button (page 7) to cue up the clip to play.
3
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator lights, and the playback picture appears in the viewfinder.
Pausing playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes while play is paused.
Press the button again to return to play mode.
High-speed playback
Press the F FWD button (page 8) or the F REV
To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/
PAUSE button.
Stopping playback
Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and the camcorder enters E-E mode.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback stops and
the thumbnail screen (page 75) appears in
the viewfinder.
Playback also stops and the timecode screen appears in the viewfinder when you start recording during playback, and when you eject an
SxS memory card.
000
4. Shooting: Basic Operations
Switching between memory cards
When two memory cards are loaded, press the
SLOT SELECT button (page 29) to select the
active slot.
It is not possible to switch between memory cards during playback.
000
4. Shooting
Advanced Operations
Recording Shot Marks
On this camcorder, two types of shot marks are available. You can record them at user-specified positions to make it easier for editors to cue up those positions.
The maximum number of shot marks per clip is
999.
You can also use the Thumbnail menu to add and delete shot
marks in clips. For details, see “Adding/Deleting Essence Marks on
To record shot marks, turn on an assignable switch assigned with the Shot Mark 1 or Shot Mark 2 function.
When a shot mark is recorded, a “Shot Mark 1” or
“Shot Mark 2” indication appears in the viewfinder for about three seconds near the timecode indicator.
Setting Clip Flags
To make it easier for editors to select good clips, you can set clip flags in recorded clips.
Clip flags are set in the Thumbnail menu. For
details, see “Adding Clip Flags to Clips” (page 78)
and “Deleting a Clip Flag” (page 79).
Recording Retroactive Images
(Picture Cache Rec Function)
The camcorder always maintains a cache of video and audio data for a set interval (maximum of
15 seconds) in internal storage memory when shooting, allowing you to record several seconds of footage before the start of recording.
This function is enabled when the camcorder is set
to any of the following video formats (page 33).
XAVC-I
XAVC-L
MPEG HD 422
MPEG HD 420
MPEG IMX 50
To start recording in picture cache mode, picture cache mode and the storage time of images in memory (picture cache time) must be set beforehand in the Operation menu.
When recording is started, the duration of footage that can be recorded retroactively is determined by the picture cache time. The duration that can be recorded retroactively may be reduced in some circumstances, as described in [Notes] below.
[Notes]
ˎ The storage of video in memory starts when picture cache mode is selected. However, if recording is started immediately after selecting this mode, a portion of the images shot immediately prior to selecting picture cache
ˎ mode will not be recorded.
ˎ Images are not stored in memory during playback, recording review, or thumbnail display, so picture cache recording of images during these periods is not supported.
Setting the picture cache time
1
Select Operation >Rec Function >Picture
Cache Rec in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press the knob.
3
Select Operation >Rec Function > Cache Rec
Time in the setup menu.
4
Turn the MENU knob to select the picture cache time setting, then press the knob.
0 to 2, 2 to 4, 4 to 6, 6 to 8, 8 to 10, 10 to 12, 12 to 14, or 13 to 15 seconds can be selected.
Once picture cache mode is selected, it is maintained until the settings are changed.
Alternatively, instead of performing steps
1
and
2
, you can also select picture cache mode using
an assignable switch (page 110) which has been
assigned with the Picture Cache function.
[Notes]
ˎ Only one special recording function, such as picture cache recording, can be used at any one time.
If another special recording mode is enabled while picture cache recording is in use, picture cache recording is
ˎ automatically released.
ˎ Changing system settings, such as the video format, clears all images stored in memory. Consequently, images shot just before changing settings cannot be recorded, if recording is started immediately after changing settings.
Picture cache mode is automatically released.
Starting picture cache recording
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
When recording starts, the “
Cache” indication in the viewfinder changes to the “
Rec” indication.
The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do during normal recording.
To exit, stop the recording,
Canceling picture cache mode
In recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec
Function >Picture Cache Rec in the setup menu to Off.
Device operation when recording in picture cache mode
The recording procedure is essentially the same, except for the following points where operation varies from normal.
ˎ If recording is started while accessing media, the actual start point of recording may be delayed even longer than the set picture cache time. The delay increases with the number of recorded clips, so stopping recording and quickly restarting recording should be avoided in picture cache mode.
ˎ Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-
RUN switch, the camcorder operates in F-RUN
ˎ mode.
ˎ In picture cache mode, time data cannot be set by switching the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
SET.
ˎ
To set time data, first stop picture cache mode.
ˎ If the remaining recording time of the media in the currently selected slot is shorter than the picture cache time, images are recorded to the media (if there is sufficient remaining recording time) in the non-selected slot.
However, images are not recorded if there is no media in the non-selected slot or if the media in the slot has insufficient remaining recording time. (A message notifying you that there is insufficient remaining recording time will appear on the viewfinder screen.)
ˎ Shot marks are not recorded, even if the shot marks are set before the recording start operation.
If the camcorder is turned off during recording
ˎ If the POWER switch on the camcorder is set to the OFF position, the media is accessed for several seconds to record the images stored in memory up till that moment, and then the power turns off automatically.
ˎ If the battery is removed, the DC cable disconnected, or the AC adaptor turned off during recording, the video and audio data stored in memory is erased, and images up till that point are not recorded. Care should be exercised when exchanging the battery.
000
4. Shooting: Advanced Operations
Recording Time-lapse Video (Interval
Rec Function)
[Notes]
ˎ Only one special recording function, such as Interval Rec recording, can be used at any one time.
If another special recording mode is enabled while
Interval Rec is in use, for example, Interval Rec is automatically released.
The camcorder’s Interval Rec function allows you to capture time-lapse video to the camcorder’s internal memory. This function is an effective way to shoot slow-moving subjects.
When you start recording, the camcorder automatically records a specified number of frames at a specified interval time.
This function is enabled when the camcorder is set
to any of the following video formats (page 33).
XAVC-I
XAVC-L
MPEG HD 422
Recording interval (Interval Time)
Number of frames in one take
(Number of Frames)
A pre-lighting function is available when Interval
Rec is enabled. This function automatically turns on the video light before recording starts, which allows you to record pictures under stable light and color temperature conditions.
Setting Interval Rec
1
Select Operation >Rec Function >Interval Rec in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press the knob.
The camcorder enters Interval Rec mode, and
“Int Stby” appears at the REC indicator position on the viewfinder screen. (The green tally indicator in the HDVF series viewfinder also flashes.)
3
Select [Number of Frames], turn the MENU knob to select the number of frames to record in one take, and then press the knob.
You can select 2, 6, or 12 when the format is
50P or 59.9P.
You can select 1, 3, 6, or 9 when the format is
23.98P, 25P, 29.97P, 50i, or 59.94i.
4
Select [Interval Time], turn the MENU knob to select the desired interval, and then press the knob.
You can select 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec, 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min, or 1 to 4/6/12/24 hour.
5
As required, select [Pre-Lighting], turn the
MENU knob to select the length of lighting time before recording starts, and then press the knob.
You can select 2, 5, 10 seconds. or Off.
[Notes]
ˎ If you want to turn the video light on before the start of recording, set the camcorder’s LIGHT switch to
AUTO. The video light switch must also be turned on.
When this is done, the video light turns on and off automatically. However, the video light remains lit if the time that it would be off is five seconds or less.
ˎ If you set the LIGHT switch to MANUAL and turn the video light switch on, the video light is always lit. (The video light does not turn on and off automatically.)
The camcorder exits Interval Rec mode when it is powered off, but the number of frames, interval time, and pre-lighting settings are maintained. You do not need to set them again the next time you shoot in Interval Rec mode.
Starting Interval Rec recording
Make the settings and preparations described
in “Basic Operations” (page 46), secure the
camcorder so that it does not move, and begin shooting.
When Interval Rec mode is set to On, “ Int Stby ” appears at the REC position on the viewfinder screen. When you start recording, “
Int Rec” and
“
Int Stby ” are displayed alternately. The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do during normal recording. (The green tally indicator in the HDVF series viewfinder also flashes at high speed.)
If you are using the pre-lighting function, the video light comes on before recording starts.
To exit, stop the recording,
When shooting ends, the video data stored in memory up to that point is written to the media.
Canceling Interval Rec mode
Do one of the following.
ˎ
ˎ In recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec
Function >Interval Rec in the setup menu to Off.
[Note]
Restarting the camcorder automatically releases Interval Rec mode.
Limitations during recording
ˎ Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-
RUN switch, the advance mode of the internal
ˎ
ˎ timecode generator is always R-RUN.
ˎ Reviewing the recording (Rec Review) is not possible.
If the camcorder is turned off during recording
ˎ If the POWER switch on the camcorder is set to the OFF position, the media is accessed for several seconds to record the images stored in memory up till that moment, and then the power turns off automatically.
ˎ If power is lost because the battery was removed, the DC power cord was disconnected, or the power was turned off on the AC adaptor side, then the video and audio data shot up to that point may be lost (maximum 10 seconds).
Care should be exercised when exchanging the battery.
Shooting with Slow & Quick Motion
When the video format (page 33) is set to one
of the formats listed below, you can specify a recording frame rate that is different from the playback frame rate.
[Note]
If shooting in XAVC recording format, the use of SxS Pro+ memory cards is recommended. The use of other SxS memory cards may be subject to limitations, so you should contact your dealer.
000
4. Shooting: Advanced Operations
Recording format
System frequency
XAVC-I 1080P 59.94P/50P/
29.97P/23.98P/
25P
XAVC-L 50
1080P
XAVC-L 35
1080P
HD422 50
1080P
59.94P/50P/
29.97P/23.98P/
25P
59.94P/50P/
29.97P/23.98P/
25P
29.97P
23.98P
25P
S&Q frame rate
1 FPS to 60 FPS
(1 FPS units)
1 FPS to 30 FPS
(1 FPS units)
1 FPS to 25 FPS
(1 FPS units)
By shooting with a frame rate that differs from the playback frame rate, you can obtain slow and quick motion effects that are smoother than lowspeed or high-speed playback of content recorded at the normal frame rate.
Setting Slow & Quick Motion
1
Select Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick
Motion in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press the knob.
Slow & Quick Motion starts, and “ S&Q Stby ” appears in the recording status indicator area in the viewfinder.
Next, set the frame rate.
3
Select Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick
Motion >Frame Rate in the setup menu.
4
Turn the MENU knob to select the frame rate, then press the knob.
When you finish making these settings, the system frequency and the frame rate appear at the top of the viewfinder screen. You can change the frame rate while viewing the display in the viewfinder by turning the MENU knob.
The Slow & Quick Motion mode setting and the frame rate are retained even after the camcorder is powered off.
[Notes]
ˎ Only one special recording function, such as Slow & Quick
Motion, can be used at any one time.
ˎ If another special recording function is enabled while using Slow & Quick Motion, Slow & Quick Motion is
ˎ automatically canceled.
ˎ Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set during recording, playback, or while the thumbnail screen is displayed.
ˎ Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set if the slow shutter function is set.
Starting Slow & Quick Motion recording
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
When recording starts, the “ S&Q Stby ” indication in the viewfinder changes to the “
S&Q Rec” indication. The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do during normal recording.
To exit, stop the recording,
[Note]
It takes longer than normal for recording to stop when the frame rate is set to a low value (for a slow frame rate).
Canceling Slow & Quick Motion mode
With the camcorder in recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick in the setup menu to Off.
Limitations during recording
ˎ Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-
RUN switch, the advance mode of the internal
ˎ timecode generator is always R-RUN.
ˎ Audio cannot be recorded when the recording and playback frame rates differ.
ˎ Reviewing the recording (Rec Review) is not possible.
ˎ If you change the recording frame rate to a value faster than the current shutter speed, the shutter speed is changed to the slowest value for which shooting is possible.
Example: If the frame rate is 32 and the shutter speed is 1/40, and you change the frame rate to
55, then the shutter speed is changed to 1/60.
It is not possible to select a shutter speed that is slower than the recording frame rate.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press the knob.
“ Cont Stby ” appears in the viewfinder, and the function is enabled.
[Notes]
ˎ Only one special recording function, such as Clip
Continuous Rec, can be used at any one time.
ˎ If another special recording mode is enabled while Clip
Continuous Rec is in use, for example, the currently selected mode is automatically released.
You can assign the Clip Continuous Rec on/off function to one of the ASSIGN. 1/2/3 switches,
ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches, or the ONLINE button.
For details, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches”
Recording with the Clip Continuous
Rec Function
Normally, a clip is created as an independent file each time that you start and stop recording. But this function allows you to start and stop recording while continuously recording to the same clip, for as long as the function remains enabled. This is convenient when you do not want to generate a large number of short clips, and when you want to record without worrying about exceeding the clip limit.
It is still easy to find recording start points, because a Rec Start essence mark is recorded at the recording start point each time you start recording.
This function is enabled when the camcorder is set
to any of the following video formats (page 33).
XAVC-I
XAVC-L
MPEG HD 422
Setting Clip Continuous Rec
1
Select Operation >Rec Function >Clip
Continuous Rec in the setup menu.
Starting Clip Continuous Rec recording
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
When recording starts, the “ Cont Stby ” indication in the viewfinder changes to “
Cont Rec” indication.
The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do during normal recording.
[Note]
During recording or in recording standby mode (when
“ Cont Stby ” indication is displayed), if you remove the media, the battery, or the power source, the media needs to be restored. It is not possible to restore media on a device other than this camcorder.
Exit Clip Continuous Rec mode (page 51) and then remove
the media.
When “ Cont Stby ” indication is flashing (once per second), you can remove the media.
To exit, stop the recording,
[Note]
Stop the recording after recording for two or more seconds.
000
4. Shooting: Advanced Operations
Canceling Clip Continuous Rec mode
With the camcorder in recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec Function >Clip Continuous
Rec in the setup menu to Off.
Limitations during recording
A single continuous clip cannot be created if you perform one of the following operations while the camcorder is in recording or recording standby mode. (A new clip will be created when you next start recording.)
ˎ Operate on a clip (lock, delete, or rename a clip)
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ Playback
ˎ
Operation >Format
>Rec Format in the setup menu
XAVC-L 50
1920×1080i
Operation >Format
>Frequency in the setup menu
59.94/50
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P 59.94/50
XAVC-L 35 1080P 59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
XAVC-L 35 1080i
XAVC-L 25 1080i
59.94/50
59.94/50
HD 422 50 1080P
HD 422 50 1080i
29.97/25/23.98
59.94/50
HD 422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080P
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
29.97/25/23.98
59.94/50
59.94/50
59.94/50
Recording Video Simultaneously to
Two SxS Memory Cards (Simul Rec)
When the video format (page 33) is set to one of
the options in the following table, you can record the same video to two SxS memory cards. This function is useful for making a video backup while shooting.
[Note]
It is recommended that both SxS memory cards be formatted (initialized) using the camcorder before use.
Operation >Format
>Rec Format in the setup menu
Operation >Format
>Frequency in the setup menu
XAVC-I 1920×1080P 59.94/59/29.97/25/23.98
XAVC-I 1920×1080i 59.94/50
XAVC-I 1280×720P
XAVC-L 50
1920×1080P
59.94/50
59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
Setting Simul Rec
1
Select Operation >Rec Function >Simul Rec in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press the knob.
[Notes]
ˎ Only one special recording function, such as Simul Rec, can be used at any one time.
ˎ If another special recording mode is enabled while using
Simul Rec, Simul Rec is automatically released.
ˎ Simul Rec cannot be set during recording, playback, or while the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Starting Simul Rec recording
1
Insert SxS memory cards in both memory slots
A and B.
The ACCESS indicators for SxS slots A and B are lit. Also, icons for SxS slots A and B appear in
2
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
[Notes]
ˎ Simultaneous recording is not possible if either of the media is defective or if the media is write protected.
ˎ During simultaneous recording, if either of the media becomes full or an error occurs and recording cannot continue, recording to that media stops but recording to the other media continues.
To exit, stop the recording,
Canceling Simul Rec mode
In recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec
Function >Simul Rec in the setup menu to Off.
000
4. Shooting
Proxy Data
Proxy data is made up of low-resolution video data
(H.264) and audio data (AAC-LC). This lightweight proxy data can be used in the same way as the original data, but it can be transferred more quickly, for more efficient viewing and editing.
During clip recording, proxy data is recorded onto the SD card inserted into the PROXY SD card slot.
PROXY SD card slot
By importing proxy data recorded on the SD card into a computer, you can quickly check the recorded content or perform rapid offline editing.
You can record proxy data separately from recording to SxS memory cards.
Proxy Recording using the Camcorder
ˎ Proxy recording will not start unless an SxS memory card is inserted.
ˎ When the camcorder has been turned on for about 35 seconds, the icon (media status indicator for Proxy SD slot) turns on in the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen to indicate that proxy recording is enabled.
If you start shooting while the icon is
ˎ flashing or is not lit, proxy files are not recorded.
ˎ Before removing an SD card from the camcorder, always check that the ACCESS indicator for the PROXY SD card slot is not lit, then turn off the camcorder or turn off the proxy recording/wireless LAN connection function.
To turn off the proxy recording/wireless LAN connection function, make the following settings in the setup menu.
– Set Operation >Proxy Recording Mode
>Setting to Off.
– Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to Off.
ˎ Attempting to remove the SD card while either the proxy recording or wireless LAN connection function is enabled may display a warning
(E91-1C0) in some cases. If the warning appears while recording, data is still recorded correctly to the SxS memory cards, but proxy files are not recorded. The warning message can be cleared
ˎ by turning the camcorder off and then on again.
ˎ Proxy recording will not start if Picture Cache
Rec, Interval Rec, Slow & Quick Motion, streaming, or network client mode is enabled.
SD Cards
SD cards supported for recording proxy data
SDHC memory cards
*
(Speed Class: 4 or higher,
Capacity: up to 32 GB)
SDXC memory cards* (Speed Class: 4 or higher)
* Referred to as “SD cards” in this manual.
Formatting (initializing) SD cards
SD cards must be formatted the first time they are used in the camcorder.
SD cards for use in the camcorder should be formatted using the format function of the camcorder. If a message appears when the SD card is inserted into the camcorder, format the SD card.
1
Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode
>Setting in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press the knob.
3
Select Operation >Format Media >SD
Card(Proxy) in the setup menu.
4
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to format the card appears.
5
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message and progress state (%) is displayed and the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
[Note]
Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card. The card cannot be restored.
Checking the remaining recording capacity
You can check the remaining capacity on an SD
card on the Media Status screen (page 14).
To use an SD card formatted on the camcorder in the slot of another device
First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the card in the device to be used.
Recording Proxy Data
To record proxy data simultaneously
1
Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode
>Setting in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press the knob.
3
Insert an SD card for recording proxy data into the PROXY SD card slot.
4
Start recording.
The proxy data file is saved in the “/PRIVATE/
PXROOT/Clip” directory of the SD card at the same time as the original data is being recorded onto an SxS memory card.
Proxy data recording automatically stops when you stop recording.
To record proxy data separately from recording original data
You can start and stop proxy recording independently by assigning the Proxy Rec Start/
Stop function to an assignable switch.
[Notes]
ˎ If simultaneous proxy recording is started while recording proxy data independently is in progress, the proxy data recording continues without interruption. Subsequently, when simultaneous recording is stopped, proxy data recording also stops.
ˎ If independent proxy recording is stopped while simultaneous recording is in progress, only the proxy data recording stops.
Proxy recording limitations
Proxy recording is not supported when any of the following functions is enabled.
ˎ the setup menu set to On).
ˎ During Interval Rec (Operation >Rec Function >Interval
Rec in the setup menu set to On)
ˎ Picture Cache Rec (Operation >Rec Function >Picture
Cache Rec in the setup menu set to On)
ˎ During Slow & Quick Motion (Operation >Rec Function
>Slow & Quick Motion in the setup menu set to On)
000
4. Shooting: Proxy Data
About the recorded files
ˎ The file name extension is “.mp4”.
ˎ
ˎ A still image of the first frame is also recorded simultaneously.
ˎ Location information and a Log file are recorded simultaneously if the GPS function is enabled.
The Log file is saved in “Root/PRIVATE/SONY/
GPS.”
Canceling proxy data recording
Set Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Setting in the setup menu to Off.
When there is insufficient remaining capacity on an SD card
A warning is displayed to indicate that there is insufficient free space.
Changing proxy recording settings
Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Size and Audio Channel in the setup menu to change the settings for the size of the proxy recording format and the audio channel for proxy recording, respectively.
Checking proxy recording settings
Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Frame
Rate and Bit Rate in the setup menu to view the settings for the video frame rate and video bit rate, respectively.
000
4. Shooting
Planning Metadata
Planning metadata is information about shooting and recording plans, recorded in an XML file.
You can shoot using clip names and shot mark names defined in advance in a planning metadata file.
[Note]
Use a font set that is compatible with the language set using
Maintenance >Language in the setup menu when defining clip names and shot mark names. Using fonts for a language that is different from the language setting on the camcorder may cause characters to be displayed abnormally.
Loading a Planning Metadata File into Camcorder Memory when
Recording a Clip
1
Save the planning metadata file on an SxS memory card beforehand.
Planning metadata files are stored in the
“General/Sony/Planning” directory.
2
Insert an SxS memory card in slot A or B.
3
Select Operation >Planning Metadata >Load
Media(A) or Load Media(B) in the setup menu.
A file list screen appears.
Up to 64 planning metadata files are displayed in the list.
4
Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load and press the knob.
5
Turn the MENU knob to select [Load] and press the knob, then select [Execute] and press the knob again.
[Note]
Data cannot be loaded from SDXC cards.
Displaying Detailed Information in
Planning Metadata
Clearing the Loaded Planning
Metadata
After loading planning metadata into the camcorder, you can check the detailed information that it contains, such as file names, date and time of creation, and titles.
1
Select Operation >Planning Metadata
>Properties in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], and then press the knob.
The planning metadata information is displayed.
Item
File Name
Assign ID
Created
Modified
Modified by
Title
Information
File name
Assign ID
Date and time of creation
Date and time of most recent modification
Name of person who modified the file
Title1 specified in file (ASCII format clip name)
Title2 Title2 specified in file (UTF-8 format clip name)
Material Group Number of material groups a)
Shot Mark0 to
Shot Mark9
Names defined in file for Shot
Mark 0 to Shot Mark 9 a) Material group: A group of clips recorded with the same planning metadata.
You can turn the MENU knob to scroll the list.
1
Select Operation >Planning Metadata >Clear
Memory in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], and then press the knob.
Deletion starts.
The message “Clear Planning Metadata File
OK” appears when the deletion finishes.
Defining Clip Names in Planning
Metadata
The following two types of clip name strings can be written in a planning metadata file.
ˎ An ASCII format name that appears in the viewfinder
ˎ A UTF-8 format name that is actually registered as the clip name
You can select which type of clip name is displayed with Operation >Planning Metadata
>Clip Name Disp in the setup menu.
When a clip name is set with planning metadata, the clip name is displayed.
[Note]
When you define both an ASCII format name and a UTF-8 format name with planning metadata, the UTF-8 format string is used as the clip name string. If you define either an
ASCII format name or a UTF-8 format name with planning metadata, the defined format name is displayed though it is not selected by menu setting.
Clip name string example
Use a text editor to modify the two fields in the
<Title> tag that contain the clip name strings.
The shaded fields in the example are clip name strings. “Typhoon” is described in ASCII format
(up to 44 characters). “Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo” is described in UTF-8 format (up to 44 bytes).
“sp” indicates a space and indicates a carriage return.
<?xml
sp version="1.0" sp encoding="
UTF-8"?>
<PlanningMetadata sp xmlns="http:// xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/ planningmetadata" sp assignId="
P0001" sp creationDate="
2015-09-30T17:00:00+09:00" sp lastUpdate="
2015-10-06T17:00:00+09:00" sp version="1.00">
<Properties sp propertyId=" assignment" sp update="
2015-10-06T17:00:00+09:00" sp modifiedBy="Chris">
<Title sp usAscii="Typhoon" sp xml:lang="en">Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo
</Title>
</Properties>
</PlanningMetadata>
[Notes]
ˎ When you create a file, enter each statement as a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in the statement line, and do not enter spaces except where specified.
ˎ Up to 44 bytes (or characters) can be entered for the clip name.
If the UTF-8 format string exceeds 44 bytes, the first 44 bytes are used as the clip name.
If only an ASCII format name is specified, a 44-character string is used as the clip name.
When neither an ASCII format name string nor UTF-8 format name string can be used, the standard format clip name is used.
000
4. Shooting: Planning Metadata
Setting clip names
1
Load a planning metadata file that contains clip names into camcorder memory
2
Set Operation >Clip >Clip Naming in the setup menu to Plan.
Each time that you record a clip, the camcorder automatically generates a name consisting of the clip name defined in the planning metadata file, with the addition of an underbar (_) and a five-digit serial number
(00001 to 99999).
Examples:Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00001,
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00002,… After the number reaches 99999, the next increment returns the number to 00001.
[Note]
When you load another planning metadata file, the serial number continues incrementing. You can change the numbering using Operation >Clip >Number Set in the setup menu.
Selecting the clip name display format
When names are defined in both ASCII format and
UTF-8 format, you can use Operation >Planning
Metadata >Clip Name Disp in the setup menu to select which of the names to display on the LCD monitor and on the viewfinder screen.
To display ASCII format names:
Select Title1(ASCII).
The clip name becomes “Typhoon_Strikes_
Tokyo_SerialNumber”, but “Typhoon_
SerialNumber” is displayed on the screen.
To display UTF-8 format names:
Select Title2(UTF-8).
The clip name becomes “Typhoon_Strikes_
Tokyo_SerialNumber”, and the same name is displayed on the screen.
Defining Shot Mark Names in
Planning Metadata
When you use planning metadata to set shot marks, you can define names for Shot Mark 0 to
Shot Mark 9.
When you record shot marks, you can add the shot mark name strings defined in the planning metadata.
[Note]
Only Shot Mark 1 and Shot Mark 2 can be recorded on the camcorder.
Shot mark name string example
Use a text editor to modify the fields in the <Meta name> tag.
The shaded fields in the example are essence mark name strings. Names can be either in ASCII format
(up to 32 characters) or UTF-8 format (up to 16 characters).
“sp” indicates a space and indicates a carriage return.
[Note]
If a name string contains even one non-ASCII character, the maximum length of that string is 16 characters.
<?xml
sp version="1.0" sp encoding="
UTF-8"?>
<PlanningMetadata xmlns="http:// xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/ planningmetadata" sp assignId="
H00123" sp creationDate="
2015-09-30T08:00:00Z" sp lastUpdate="
2015-09-30T15:00:00Z" sp
"1.00"> version=
<Properties sp
"assignment" propertyId= sp class="original" sp update="2015-09-30T15:00:00Z" sp modifiedBy="Chris">
<Title sp
Game" sp usAscii="Football xml:lang="en">
Football Game 30/09/2015</
Title>
<Meta sp name="_ShotMark1" sp content="Goal"/>
<Meta sp name="_ShotMark2" sp content="Shoot"/>
<Meta sp name="_ShotMark3" sp content="Corner Kick"/>
<Meta sp name="_ShotMark4" sp content="Free Kick"/>
<Meta sp name="_ShotMark5" sp content="Goal Kick"/>
<Meta sp name="_ShotMark6" sp content="Foul"/>
<Meta sp name="_ShotMark7" sp content="PK"/>
<Meta sp name="_ShotMark8" sp content="1st Half"/>
<Meta sp name="_ShotMark9" sp content="2nd Half"/>
<Meta sp name="_ShotMark0" sp content="Kick Off"/>
</Properties>
</PlanningMetadata>
[Note]
When you create a definition file, enter each statement as a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in the statement line, and do not enter spaces except where specified, except within essence mark name strings.
000
4. Shooting
Obtaining Location Information (GPS)
Location and time information of video shot when positioning is enabled is recorded by the camcorder.
The GPS function is set to Off by factory default.
1
Check that the camcorder is in standby state.
2
Set Operation GPS to On in the setup menu.
is displayed in the viewfinder when the camcorder is seeking GPS satellites. When positioning is established, location information is recorded when shooting video.
The icon displayed in the viewfinder varies, depending on the signal reception from the GPS satellites.
Display GPS reception state Positioning status
Off
Positioning not available
Searching for satellites
Positioning
No display GPS is set to Off or an error occurred.
Location information could not be obtained because GPS signal could not be received.
Move to a location with a clear view of the sky.
Searching for GPS satellites. Several minutes may be required to acquire satellites.
A weak GPS signal is being received.
A GPS signal is being received. Location information can be acquired.
A strong GPS signal is being received. Location information can be acquired.
ˎ It may take some time to start acquiring location information after turning on the camcorder.
ˎ If a positioning icon is not displayed after several minutes, there may be a problem with signal reception. Start shooting without location information, or move to an area with a clear view of the sky. Shooting when a positioning icon is not displayed means that location information will not be recorded.
ˎ The GPS signal may not be received when indoors or near tall structures. Move to a
ˎ location with a clear view of the sky.
ˎ The recording of location information may be interrupted, depending on the strength of the received signal, even if a positioning icon is displayed.
000
5. Network Configuration
Network Functions Supported by the Camcorder
The camcorder supports various network functions. This section provides an overview and detailed description of the network connections and functions.
Network Connection Overview
Connecting devices using wireless LAN
The camcorder can connect to smartphones, tablets, and other devices using wireless LAN connection using the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN
Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN
Adaptor (option).
1
Select the wireless connection device.
IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module
CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option)
2
Select the wireless LAN access mode.
Wi-Fi Access Point mode (page 59)
Wi-Fi Station mode (page 60)
Connecting to the Internet using a LAN cable
Connect the camcorder to the Internet via a router using the network connector.
1
Connect the camcorder and router using a
LAN cable.
Connecting to the Internet using wireless LAN
Connect the camcorder to the Internet using the
IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied),
CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option), or modem (option).
[Note]
The CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit (option) is required if connecting using a CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option) or modem (option).
When using the IFU-WLM3 (supplied)
1
Attach the IFU-WLM3 to the camcorder.
2
Set the wireless LAN access mode to Wi-Fi
Station mode and connect to the Internet.
When using the CBK-WA02 (option)
1
Attach the CBK-WA02 to the camcorder.
2
Set the wireless LAN access mode to Wi-Fi
Station mode and connect to the Internet.
Using a modem
1
Attach the USB extension adaptor of the
CBK-NA1 (option).
2
Connect the modem.
Network Function Overview Common Information
Transferring files recorded on the camcorder to a server on the Internet
You can transfer proxy files recorded on an SD card and original files recorded on SxS memory cards to a server on the Internet when connected via a 3G/4G/LTE network, access point, wired LAN router.
Transmitting streaming video and audio
You can transmit the video and audio captured/ played back with the camcorder via the Internet or local network.
Streaming using the streaming settings on the camcorder
High-quality streaming using a Sony PWS-100RX1
Network RX Station (option) as a Connection Control
Manager
Using Wi-Fi remote control
You can access the Wi-Fi remote control built into the camcorder from a smartphone, tablet, or other device over a wireless LAN connection.
Configuring from the web menu
The web menu of the camcorder appears when the camcorder is accessed from a browser on a device connected using a wireless LAN connection.
Supported network functions and operating limitations
000
5. Network Configuration
Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN
The camcorder can connect to smartphones, tablets, and other devices using wireless LAN connection by attaching the IFU-WLM3 USB
Wireless LAN Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02
Wireless LAN Adaptor (option).
The following operations can be performed between the camcorder and devices connected using a wireless LAN.
[Note]
USB wireless LAN modules/adaptors other than the IFU-
WLM3 or CBK-WA02 cannot be used.
Remote operation via wireless LAN
The camcorder can be operated remotely from a smartphone, tablet, or computer that is connected using a wireless LAN.
File transfer via wireless LAN
Proxy files (low-resolution files) stored on the camcorder SD card and original files (highresolution files) recorded on the camcorder can be transferred to a server via a wireless LAN.
Monitoring video via wireless LAN
You can create a stream (H.264) of the camera picture or playback picture of the camcorder for monitoring from a device via wireless LAN using the
“Content Browser Mobile” application.
“Content Browser Mobile” is an application that can operate the camcorder remotely on the device screen, while streaming content, and can be used to configure the camcorder.
You can also transfer a cutout part of a file by specifying In and Out points in the proxy file
Always check that you have the latest version of the “Content Browser Mobile” application.
For details about the “Content Browser Mobile” application, contact your Sony sales or service representative.
[Notes]
ˎ Proxy files (low-resolution files) recorded on the SD card in the camcorder can be streamed via a wireless LAN.
ˎ to MPEG-IMX or DVCAM.
ˎ Obstructions and electromagnetic interference between the camcorder and wireless LAN access point or terminal device, or the ambient environment (such as wall materials) could shorten the communication range or prevent connections altogether. If you experience these problems, check the connection/communication status after moving the camcorder to a new location, or bringing the camcorder and access point/terminal device closer together.
Compatible Devices
You can use a smartphone, tablet, or computer to configure and operate the camcorder. The supported devices, OS, and browsers are shown in the following table.
Device
Smartphone
Tablet
Computer
OS
Android
4.4/5.0/5.1/6.0
iOS 8.0/8.1/8.2/
8.3/8.4/9.0
Android
4.4/5.0/5.1/6.0
iOS 8.0/8.1/8.2/
8.3/8.4/9.0
Microsoft
Windows 7/
Microsoft
Windows 8/
Microsoft
Windows 10
Mac OS
10.9/10.10
Browser
Chrome
Safari
Chrome
Chrome
Safari
[Note]
Playback may not be supported, depending on the operating system of the terminal device used and the browser version. If this occurs, use “Content Browser Mobile.”
Attaching the IFU-WLM3
1
Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN module connector.
Guard (supplied)
2
Attach the protective cap to the IFU-WLM3.
3
Plug the IFU-WLM3 into the connector.
[Notes]
ˎ Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or removing the IFU-WLM3.
ˎ For attachment of the guard, contact a Sony service representative.
If not using the IFU-WLM3
Unscrew the two screws, remove the guard, and close the connector cover.
Attaching the CBK-WA02
1
Attach the attachment bracket to the handle in the position shown in the following diagram.
For attachment of the attachment bracket
(Service Part No. A-2092-367-), contact a Sony service representative.
Attachment bracket
2
Attach the USB extension adaptor, supplied with the CBK-WA02 (option), to the attachment bracket.
3
Turn the fixing screw clockwise to secure the
USB extension adaptor.
000
5. Network Configuration: Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN
4
Fixing screw
USB extension adaptor
Guard (supplied)
You can adjust the position of the USB extension adaptor over the range shown in the following diagram.
6
Plug the USB connector of the USB extension adaptor into the USB wireless LAN module connector.
8
Set the wireless LAN channel in Maintenance
>Network >Channel in the setup menu
For details about using the CBK-WA02, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the CBK-WA02.
[Notes]
ˎ Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or removing the CBK-WA02.
ˎ Attaching the CBK-WA02 and selecting Wi-Fi Station in Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup menu enables connection to a 5 GHz access point.
ˎ The Ch setting “Auto(5GHz)” in Wi-Fi Access Point mode may not be displayed, depending on the CBK-WA02 used.
ˎ “Auto(5GHz)” is not displayed in the menu if use of the
CBK-WA02 in the 5 GHz band is prohibited for outdoor use in your country or region. Check that the use of the
CBK-WA02 is permitted in your country or region. For details, refer to the CBK-WA02 operation manual.
If not using the CBK-WA02
Unscrew the two screws, remove the guard, and close the connector cover.
Connecting using Wireless LAN
Access Point (Wi-Fi Access Point
Mode)
The camcorder can connect to devices that are set up as an access point.
Computer
Smartphone/
Tablet
Attach the protective cap (supplied) to the
USB connector of the USB extension adaptor.
7
Plug the CBK-WA02 into the USB connector of the USB extension adaptor.
One-touch connection using NFC-equipped devices
Devices that support NFC can be connected by one touch using NFC.
1
Select [Settings] on the device and enable the
[NFC] function.
5
Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN module connector.
For attachment of the guard, contact a Sony service representative.
2
Turn the camcorder on, and set Maintenance
>Network >Wireless Network to Wi-Fi Access
Point.
3
Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
000
5. Network Configuration: Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN
4
Enable the NFC function.
Set NFC connection mode by executing
Maintenance >Network >NFC in the setup menu or by pressing and holding an assignable switch that has been assigned with the NFC function for three seconds.
The NFC function can be used only when is displayed on the screen.
[Note]
It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds) for to appear on the screen. Wait until the network “AP” (access
point) wireless network indicator (page 16) stops flashing
on the viewfinder screen.
5
Touch the device against the camcorder.
The device connects to the camcorder, and
“Content Browser Mobile” launches.
[Notes]
ˎ Wake a sleeping device and unlock the lock screen beforehand.
ˎ Continue to hold the device against the camcorder without moving it until “Content Browser Mobile” launches (1 to 2 seconds).
ˎ If a device with identical SSID has already been registered, the device may not be able to be connected, depending on the OS version of the device. In this case, you can connect the device by deleting the registered SSID from the device.
Connecting using WPS-equipped devices
Devices that support WPS can be connected using
WPS.
1
Set Maintenance >Network >Wireless Network to Wi-Fi Access Point.
2
Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
[Note]
It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds) to enable access point mode. Wait until the network “AP” (access point)
indicator (page 16) stops flashing on the LCD monitor or
in the viewfinder.
3
Select Maintenance >Network >WPS in the setup menu.
4
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
5
Open the device Network Settings or Wi-Fi
Settings, and turn Wi-Fi on.
6
Select the camcorder SSID from the Wi-Fi network SSID list, display Option, and select
WPS Push Button.
[Note]
The steps will vary depending on the device used.
Connecting using SSID and password on the device
Connect by entering the SSID and password on the device.
1
Set Maintenance >Network >Wireless Network to Wi-Fi Access Point.
2
Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
[Note]
It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds) to enable access point mode. Wait until the net work “AP” (access
point) indicator (page 16) stops flashing on the LCD
monitor or in the viewfinder.
3
Open the device Network Settings or Wi-Fi
Settings, and turn Wi-Fi on.
4
Select the camcorder SSID from the Wi-Fi network SSID list, then enter a password to connect.
For the camcorder SSID and password, see
Maintenance >Network >SSID & Password
[Note]
The steps will vary depending on the device used.
Connecting Using Wireless LAN
Station Mode (Wi-Fi Station Mode)
The camcorder can connect to an existing wireless
LAN access point as a client.
The device connects via the access point.
Smartphone/
Tablet
Computer
Access point
Connecting to an access point using WPS
If an access point supports the WPS function, you can connect using a basic setting. If an access point does not support the WPS function, see
“Connecting to an access point in station mode without using WPS” (page 72).
1
Turn the access point on.
2
Turn the camcorder on.
3
Set Maintenance >Network >Wireless Network to Wi-Fi Station.
4
Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
[Note]
It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to enable
station mode. Wait until the network indicator (page 16)
signal strength icon stops flashing on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
5
Select Maintenance >Network >WPS in the setup menu.
6
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
7
Press the access point WPS button.
For details about WPS button operation, refer to the instruction manual for the access point.
When the connection is successful, the
network indicator (page 16) signal strength
icon will show a strength of 1 or higher on the
LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
[Note]
If the connection fails, perform the procedure again from step
1
.
8
Connect the device to the access point.
For details about how to connect, refer to the instruction manual for each device.
000
5. Network Configuration
Connecting to the Internet
You can connect to the Internet using a wired LAN or wireless LAN.
For wired LAN, connect a LAN cable (not supplied) to the network connector on the camcorder, and connect to the Internet via a router.
For wireless LAN, connect to the Internet using the
IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied),
CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option), or modem (option).
Required device for network connection
For details, see “Limitations on Simultaneous Use of Network Functions” (page 74).
Connecting Using a LAN Cable
(Wired LAN Connection)
You can connect to the Internet using a wired LAN connection via a router connected to the network connector on the camcorder.
Wireless LAN connection
One of the following devices is required.
ˎ
ˎ
CBK-NA1E USB Extension Adaptor supplied with the CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit (option)
ˎ Modem (option) + CBK-NA1E USB Extension
Adaptor supplied with the CBK-NA1 Network
Adaptor Kit (option)
Wired LAN connection
Computer
Router
[Notes]
ˎ The wireless LAN module may not be available in some countries/regions.
ˎ The frequency band for the wireless LAN module is shared by various devices. Depending on the use environment, transmission speed and distance may be decreased, or communication may be disconnected, by using other
ˎ devices.
ˎ To use the 3G/4G/LTE services, you need to contract with
ˎ a cell phone company.
ˎ For details about the required compatible device for the network connection, contact your Sony dealer or a Sony service representative.
Limitations on simultaneous use of network connection function
The camcorder can connect to a network using wireless LAN or wired LAN methods.
However, there are limits on the simultaneous use of these connection functions.
Internet
1
Connect the network connector of the camcorder and a router using a LAN cable.
Preparation for Connection to the
Internet Using a Modem
2
Set Maintenance >Network >Wired LAN to
Enable.
3
Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
An IP address is automatically assigned to the camcorder.
[Notes]
ˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) for the wired LAN connection to become enabled. Wait until
the network status indicator (page 16) LAN icon stops
ˎ flashing on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
ˎ To transfer original files/proxy files recorded on the camcorder, use Wi-Fi remote control, operate the web menu, or monitor output using the “Content Browser
Mobile” application, set Maintenance >Network >Wired
LAN Remote in the setup menu to On (page 105).
ˎ When connected to a network, using a LAN cable, that will not be used to connect to the Internet, it is recommended that Wired LAN Remote be set to On to prevent unauthorized access from the Internet. When connecting to the Internet, check that the network connection is to a secure network before use.
ˎ A wired LAN connection is not possible if a modem
(option) is attached to the USB wireless LAN module connector. For wired LAN connection, first remove the modem (option).
ˎ When connected to the Internet using Wi-Fi Station mode and the wired LAN is not connected to the Internet, a network error may occur and Internet-related functions may not operate. In this case, set Wired LAN to Disable, and connect to the Internet using Wi-Fi- Station mode only.
Attach the CBK-NA1E USB extension adaptor, supplied with the CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor
Kit (option), to the USB wireless LAN module connector on the camcorder when planning to connect to the Internet via a 3G/4G network using the USB wireless LAN module connector.
1
Attach the attachment bracket to the handle in the position shown in the following diagram.
For attachment of the attachment bracket
(Service Part No. A-2092-367-), contact a Sony service representative.
Attachment bracket
2
Attach the USB extension adaptor to the attachment bracket.
000
5. Network Configuration: Connecting to the Internet
3
Turn the fixing screw clockwise to secure the
USB extension adaptor.
Fixing screw
USB extension adaptor
5
Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN module connector.
For attachment of the guard, contact a Sony service representative.
Guard (supplied)
You can adjust the position of the USB extension adaptor over the range shown in the following diagram.
6
Plug the USB connector of the USB extension adaptor into the USB wireless LAN module connector.
Connecting Using a Modem
You can connect the camcorder to the Internet via a 3G/4G network by attaching a modem (option) to the camcorder using a CBK-NA1 Network
Adaptor Kit (option).
Internet
[Notes]
ˎ Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or removing the CBK-NA1 and modem.
ˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to enable modem mode. Wait until the “3G/4G” network status
indicator (page 16) stops flashing on the LCD screen or
in the viewfinder.
Connecting Using Wireless LAN
Station Mode (Wi-Fi Station Mode)
Connecting
CBK-NA1
+
Modem
1
Connect the modem (option) to the USB connector of the CBK-NA1E USB extension adaptor.
You can connect to the Internet using Wi-Fi station mode by attaching the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless
LAN Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN
Adaptor (option) to the camcorder, and using a
3G/4G/LTE-compatible access point (option) or using device tethering.
For details about attaching devices, see “Attaching the IFU-WLM3” (page 58) and “Attaching the
4
Attach the protective cap (supplied) to the
USB connector of the USB extension adaptor.
For details about connecting a modem, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the modem.
2
Set Maintenance >Network >Wireless Network to Modem.
3
Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
000
5. Network Configuration: Connecting to the Internet
Smartphone/
Tablet
Computer
Access point
Internet
Smartphone/
Tablet
Internet
If the access point and device supports WPS,
connect using the procedure in “Connecting to an access point using WPS” (page 60). If WPS is
not supported, connect using the procedure in
“Connecting to an access point in station mode without using WPS” (page 72).
First, turn the access point and device on, and configure the device tethering function if planning to use tethering.
000
5. Network Configuration
Transferring Files
You can transfer proxy files recorded on an SD card and original files recorded on SxS memory cards to a server on the Internet when connected to the
Internet via a 3G/4G/LTE network, access point, or wired LAN router.
Preparation for Transfer
1
Connect the camcorder to the Internet using
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 58) and “Connecting to
2
You must first register a server to which you want to transfer files.
For details about registering a server, see “To register a new destination server” (page 73).
Transferring
You can select proxy files on an SD card or original files on SxS memory cards for transfer to a server.
Transferring proxy files on an SD card
1
Connect the camcorder and device using a
LAN connection, then launch a browser on the device to access the camcorder.
2
Display a file list screen to select files.
3
Tap and select [Media Info], then tap [SD
Card].
The SD Card screen appears.
Using “Content Browser Mobile” application version 2.0 or later, you can quickly display a thumbnail for a proxy file on an SD card by using the still image of the first frame.
4
Select the files you want to transfer.
Tap a file to select it. Tap a file a second time to de-select it. You can double-tap a file to play the file to check its content.
5
Tap [Transfer].
The default destination server specified in
[Default Setting] appears (see “To register a new destination server” (page 73)).
To change the destination server, tap the destination server to display a list and then select a different server. Enter the directory on the destination server, as required.
6
Tap [Transfer].
Transfer of the selected files begins. To cancel file transfer, tap [Cancel].
Transferring parts of proxy files
Using “Content Browser Mobile” application version 2.0 or later, you can specify In/Out points from proxy files to cut out and transfer the cutout parts.
You can also transfer the cutout portions of multiple files using the Storyboard.
[Notes]
ˎ Margins of up to 15 frames are added before and after the cutout region in the created file.
ˎ Files created from cutouts from proxy files recorded using network function software (V1.25 or earlier) may not be imported into non-linear editors.
ˎ When partial transfer is performed using the Storyboard, the file for sending Storyboard information to a non-linear
ˎ editor is displayed in the Job List.
ˎ When transferring, a General/Sony/tmp folder is created automatically on the SD card. The file is temporarily stored in this folder, and is automatically deleted after the file transfer is completed.
Transferring original files on SxS memory cards
1
Connect the camcorder and device using a
LAN connection, then launch a browser on the device to connect to the camcorder
“Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN”
2
Select Maintenance >File Transfer >File
Transfer in the setup menu.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
File transfer mode is initiated.
4
Display a file list screen to select files in the browser on the device.
5
Tap and select [Media Info], then tap Slot A
(for files recorded on media in slot A) or Slot B
(for files recorded on media in slot B).
The Slot A or Slot B screen appears.
Example: Slot A screen
6
Select the files you want to transfer.
Tap a file to select it. Tap a file a second time to de-select it.
7
Tap [Transfer].
The default destination server specified in
[Default Setting] appears (see “To register a new destination server” (page 73)).
To change the destination server, tap the destination server to display a list and then select a different server.
Enter the directory on the destination server in
[Directory].
8
Tap [Transfer].
Transfer of the selected files begins. To cancel file transfer, tap [Cancel].
[Note]
Files cannot be transferred under the following conditions.
ˎ During recording, playback, or when displaying the thumbnail screen
ˎ When Maintenance >Network >Wireless Network >Wi-Fi
Access Point and Wired LAN >Disable in the setup menu are set to Disable
ˎ When the streaming function is enabled (Maintenance
>Streaming >Setting is set to On)
000
5. Network Configuration: Transferring Files
Monitoring the File Transfer
Tap [Job List] on the SD Card, Slot A, or Slot B screen to display the Job List screen to check the
status of the file transfer (page 73).
000
5. Network Configuration
Transmitting Streaming Video and Audio
You can transmit the video and audio captured/ played back with the camcorder via the Internet or local network.
Preparation for Streaming
Transmission
– Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup menu is set to Off
– Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting in the setup menu is set to On
ˎ It may take several tens of seconds to stream actual video or audio after starting streaming.
ˎ You cannot start streaming when playing back an SD format clip.
ˎ If you set the streaming transmission destination is set incorrectly or the camcorder does not connect to the network, “×” appears on the screen as the streaming status indicator.
ˎ Streaming in network client mode (page 67),
monitoring, proxy recording, and file transfer are not
ˎ available after switching to streaming mode.
ˎ Starting streaming while monitoring, proxy recording, or transferring files will stop the corresponding function.
1
Connect the camcorder to the Internet using
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 58) and “Connecting to
2
Select Preset1 (or Preset2, Preset3) in
Maintenance >Streaming in the setup menu.
The streaming connection destination setup screen appears.
3
Set Size, Bit Rate, Type, and items according to
Type on the screen.
4
Select Preset1 (or Preset2, Preset3), set in steps
1
and
2
, in Maintenance >Streaming >Preset
Select in the setup menu.
Starting Streaming
Stopping Streaming
Set Maintenance >Streaming >Setting to Off to stop streaming.
When Streaming is On, streaming can also be stopped by pressing the assignable button to which Streaming has been assigned.
When the camcorder is connected to a device
via Wireless LAN (page 58) or is connected to
the Internet using wireless LAN station mode
(page 60), you can also set the streaming
transmission destination and start/stop streaming
1
Set Maintenance >Streaming >Setting in the setup menu to On.
Streaming starts according to the settings.
You can assign Streaming to an assignable button. For details about assignment, see
“Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches”
[Notes]
ˎ Streaming cannot be started under the following menu settings.
000
5. Network Configuration
Streaming High Quality Video
High-quality streaming is supported by enabling network client mode and connecting and using a PWS-100RX1 Network RX Station (option) as a
Connection Control Manager (CCM).
1
Connect the camcorder to the network.
For details, see “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 58) and “Connecting to
2
Set each item in Maintenance >Network Client
Mode >Detail Settings in the setup menu.
Item
CCM Address
CCM Port
Description
Enter the IP address of the
CCM to connect. (Host name or IP address)
Enter the port number of the
CCM to connect.
User Name
Password
Enter the user name.
Enter the password.
NCM With Proxy Enable/disable proxy recording when connected with a CCM.
[Notes]
ˎ Network client mode cannot be set if values are not entered for all items.
ˎ Setting NW Client Mode >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu to Enable enables proxy recording, even when network client mode is enabled. To enable the NCM with Proxy setting, set Operation >Proxy
ˎ
Recording Mode >Setting in the setup menu to On.
ˎ If NW Client Mode >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable, proxy recording stops if network client mode is set to On during recording.
If original file recording is continuing, set both to Off to restart proxy recording.
3
Set Maintenance >Network Client Mode
>Setting in the setup menu to On.
Network client mode is enabled, and the camcorder connects to the PWS-100RX1
Network RX Station.
Live streaming starts in response to PWS-
100RX1 Network RX Station operation.
For details about operation, refer to the instruction manual for the PWS-100RX1
Network RX Station.
You can assign Setting (On/Off) for Network
Client Mode to an assignable button. For
details about assignment, see “Assigning
Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 110).
[Notes]
ˎ Changing to network client mode during normal
streaming (page 66) is not possible.
ˎ After changing to network client mode, normal streaming
(page 66) and monitoring are not available.
ˎ Changing to network client mode while monitoring will stop the monitoring.
ˎ File transfer is not supported during streaming in network client mode. File transfer is supported after stopping streaming.
ˎ If streaming in network client mode is started during file transfer, the file transfer stops. File transfer restarts after
ˎ stopping streaming.
ˎ The available streaming bit rates that can be configured by the PWS-100RX1 Network RX Station are limited to the following, depending on the proxy recording format.
– If the proxy recording format is 1280×720
9Mbps/6Mbps, the streaming bit rate is set to 1 Mbps or lower.
– If the proxy recording format is 640×360 3Mbps, the
ˎ streaming bit rate is set to 3 Mbps or lower.
ˎ The proxy format cannot be changed in network client mode. To change the format, first set Network Client
Mode to Off.
Transferring files in network client mode
You can transfer files to a server set by the CCM by connecting a PWS-100RX1 Network RX Station acting as a CCM and the camcorder in network client mode.
1
Select the files you want to transfer.
ˎ To transfer a proxy recording:
Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Transferring proxy files on an SD card” (page 64).
ˎ To transfer original files:
Follow steps 1 to 6 in “Transferring original files on SxS memory cards” (page 64)
2
Tap [Transfer].
“NCM: RX Server” is displayed as a destination.
Specify “NCM: RX Server” as the destination.
3
Tap [Transfer].
Transfer of the selected files to the server specified on the CCM starts.
[Note]
The destination can also be set to “NCM: RX Server” when not in network client mode.
In this case, transfer is placed on hold, and then transfer to the server specified on the CCM starts after connecting to the CCM in network client mode.
000
5. Network Configuration
Using Wi-Fi Remote Control
You can access the Wi-Fi remote control built into the camcorder from a smartphone, tablet, or other device over a wireless LAN connection.
Using the Wi-Fi remote control allows you to operate the camcorder remotely. This allows you to start/stop recording or configure settings remotely, and is useful in applications where the camcorder is fixed in a remote location or mounted on a crane, for example.
Displaying the Wi-Fi Remote Control
using [Cam Remote Control] (page 70) from
the web menu.
[Notes]
ˎ To display the page for a smartphone, change “rm.
html” to “rms.html” in the URL. To display the page for a tablet, change “rm.html” to “rmt.html” in the URL. When
“rm.html” is entered, the page automatically switches for display on the corresponding device. However, the appropriate page may not be displayed, depending on
ˎ the device.
ˎ The Wi-Fi Remote screen may not match the camcorder settings under the following circumstances. If this occurs, reload the browser window.
– If the camcorder is restarted while connected
– If the camcorder is operated directly while connected
– If the device has been reconnected
– If the browser Forward/Back buttons have been used
ˎ The Wi-Fi remote control may not function if the wireless signal strength becomes weak.
The Wi-Fi Remote screen is automatically resized to match the screen size of the connected device.
1
Connect the camcorder to the Internet using
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 58) and “Connecting to
2
Launch a browser on the device and enter
“http://<IP_address>/rm.html” in the URL bar, where “<IP_address>” is the IP address
(Maintenance >Network >IP Address (Wireless) in the setup menu) of the camcorder.
For example, if the IP address is 192.168.1.1, enter “http://192.168.1.1/rm.html” in the URL bar.
3
Enter the user name and password
(Maintenance >Basic Authentication
(page 105) in the setup menu) on the
browser screen.
When connection is successful, the Wi-Fi
Remote screen appears on the device.
You use the Wi-Fi Remote screen to operate the camcorder.
You can disable the REC button operation by sliding the Lock knob to the right on the screen.
You can also display the Wi-Fi remote control
Wi-Fi Remote Screen (Smartphones)
Main screen
Playback screen
ˎ Status display
ˎ
Iris, Focus, Zoom, S&Q FPS,
Shutter, White, Gamma, Auto
Iris, Gain, ATW, Color Bars, Auto
Black, Auto White
ˎ Status display
ˎ
F Rev, Play/Pause, F Fwd, Prev,
Stop, Next
Cursor screen
Assign screen
ˎ Status indicators
ˎ status display
Up, Left, Set, Right, Down,
Cancel/Back, Menu, Status,
Thumbnail, Option (SHIFT +
SET)
ˎ Status display
ˎ
Assignable buttons 0, 1, 3, 4, 5
000
5. Network Configuration: Using Wi-Fi Remote Control
Wi-Fi Remote Screen (Tablets)
Main screen
Cursor screen
ˎ Status display
ˎ
Up, Left, Set, Right, Down, Cancel/Back, Menu, Status,
Thumbnail, Option (SHIFT + SET)
Assign screen
ˎ Status display
ˎ
Assignable buttons 0, 1, 3, 4, 5
ˎ Shooting settings
S&Q FPS, Shutter, White, Gamma, Auto Iris, Gain, ATW,
Color Bars, Auto Black, Auto White
Playback screen
ˎ Assignable buttons
Assignable buttons 0, 1, 3, 4, 5
ˎ Status display
ˎ
F Rev, Play/Pause, F Fwd, Prev, Stop, Next
000
5. Network Configuration
Configuring from the Web Menu
The web menu of the camcorder appears when the camcorder is accessed from a browser on a device connected using a wireless LAN connection. Using the web menu, you can configure settings related to wireless functions, transfer files, and perform other actions.
Displaying the Web Menu
1
Connect the camcorder to the Internet using
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 58) and “Connecting to
2
Launch a browser on the device and enter
“http://192.168.1.1:8080/index.html” in the URL bar.
The user name and password entry screen appears.
3
Enter a user name and password, then select
[OK].
For the user name and password for access authentication, see Maintenance >Basic
Authentication (page 105) in the setup menu.
Info, Job List, and Cam Remote Control.
Settings
Used to configure the camcorder. This screen has the following items.
Item
Wireless
Module
>Streaming
Format
Wireless
Module
>Proxy
Format
Wireless LAN
>Station
Settings
Wireless LAN
>Status
Description See
Streaming format settings
Proxy format settings
Wireless LAN settings
Wireless LAN settings status
Wired LAN settings
Wired LAN
>Wired LAN
Settings
Wired LAN
>Status
Upload
Settings
Wired LAN settings status
Transfer settings
Checking wired LAN settings(page 72)
[Note]
Playback may not be supported, depending on the operating system of the terminal device used and the browser version. If this occurs, use “Content Browser
Mobile.”
ˎ Slot A: Media inserted into card slot A of the camcorder
ˎ Slot B: Media inserted into card slot B of the camcorder
Job List
Displays the Job List screen for managing file
Cam Remote Control
Displays the Wi-Fi remote control screen
Streaming Format Settings
Setup Menu
Launch a browser on the device and enter
“http://<IP_address>:8080” in the URL bar, where
“<IP_address>” is the IP address (Maintenance
>Network >IP Address in the setup menu) of the camcorder, to display the Media Info >SD Card screen of the camcorder
Tapping in the top left of the web menu screen will display the configuration menus. Tap the item you want to configure.
The menu has the following items: Settings, Media
Media Info
Displays media information and is used to select files to transfer from media.
ˎ SD Card: Media inserted into the PROXY SD card slot of the camcorder
Double-clicking a file will start playback of the selected file.
You can configure the stream for monitoring by devices, and set the format and transmission destination of the stream for streaming via the
Internet or local network.
Video
ˎ AVC/H.264 Main Profile, 4:2:0 Long GOP
ˎ Size is selected in the following settings.
Audio
ˎ AAC-LC compression
ˎ Sampling frequency: 48 kHz
ˎ
Monitoring Settings
You can set the format for monitoring by devices.
Item
Monitoring
Size
Monitoring
Frame Rate
Monitoring
Bit Rate
Description
Sets the video size and bit rate for monitoring.
Displays the video frame rate for monitoring.
Displays the video bit rate for monitoring.
Setting
480×270(1Mbps)/
480×270(0.5Mbps)
23.98fps/25fps/
29.97fps/50fps/
59.94fps
1Mbps(VBR)/
0.5Mbps(VBR)
[Notes]
ˎ The bit rate is an average value, so this value may be exceeded at times.
ˎ A video frame rate of 24 fps is not supported.
ˎ
Size.
000
5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu
Streaming settings
You can set the format and transmission destination for streaming. Up to three settings can be preset.
Item
On/Off
Description
Switches streaming transmission on/off.
Setting
On/Off
Preset
Type
Selects the preset from Preset 1 to
Preset 3. You can edit Preset by tapping Edit.
Selects the type of video for streaming.
Preset1/Preset2/
Preset3
MPEG-2 TS/UDP/
MPEG-2 TS/
RTP
Size
Bit Rate
Destination
Address
Sets the size of video for streaming.
When HD Auto is selected, the size is set to 1920×1080 or
1280×720, according to the setting of the recording format recorded on the
SxS memory card or the format of the clip to be played back.
Sets the bit rate of video for streaming.
The selectable bit rate varies depending on the
Size setting.
Enter the address of the transmission destination server for streaming data.
HD Auto/
1280×720/
640×360/
480×270
9Mbps/
6Mbps/
3Mbps/
2Mbps/
1Mbps/
0.5Mbps
Host name or IP address
Item
Destination
Port
Audio
Channel
Select
Description
Enter the port number of the transmission destination server used for streaming.
Selects the audio channels for the streaming output.
Setting
1 to 65535
Ch-1 & Ch-2/
Ch-3 & Ch-4
[Notes]
ˎ When Streaming is set to On, the monitoring function cannot be used.
ˎ Audio/video data is transmitted as-is via the Internet.
Accordingly, the data may potentially be exposed to other parties.
Always check that the transmission destination can receive the streaming data.
The data may be sent to an unintended party if the address or other settings are configured incorrectly.
ˎ Not all frames may be played, depending on the status of the network.
ˎ The picture quality may deteriorate in scenes with excessive motion.
ˎ Not all frames may be played when the stream is set to a large size with a small bit rate.
To reduce this, select a smaller size for the Size setting.
Proxy Format Settings
You can set the format of the proxy file that is recorded on the SD card of the camcorder.
Video
ˎ XAVC Proxy (AVC/H.264 Main Profile, 4:2:0 Long
GOP)
Item
Proxy File recording
>Size
Proxy File recording
>Frame
Rate
Proxy File recording
>Bit Rate
Proxy File recording
>Audio
Channel
Select
Description
Sets the video size and bit rate for proxy files.
Setting
1280×720(9Mbps)/
1280×720(6Mbps)/
640×360(3Mbps)/
480×270(1Mbps)/
480×270(0.5Mbps)
Displays the video frame rate for proxy files.
23.98fps/
25fps/
29.97fps/
50fps/
59.94fps
Displays the video bit rate for proxy files.
Sets the audio channel to record to proxy data.
9Mbps(VBR)/
6Mbps(VBR)/
3Mbps(VBR)/
1Mbps(VBR)/
0.5Mbps(VBR)
Ch-1 & Ch-2/
Ch-3 & Ch-4
[Notes]
ˎ The bit rate is an average value, so this value may be exceeded at times.
Audio
ˎ AAC-LC compression
ˎ Sampling frequency: 48 kHz
ˎ
Wireless LAN Station Settings
Use this screen to make settings for connecting the camcorder to a wireless LAN.
Item
Host Name
SSID
Key
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet mask
Gateway
DNS Auto
Description
Name of the camcorder (can be modified)
Displays the SSID selected in
[Access Point].
Enter the password for the access point.
Enables/disables DHCP.
When set to [On], an IP address is automatically assigned to the camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP address manually, set to [Off].
Enter the IP address of the camcorder. Enabled only when
DHCP is [Off].
Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
Enter the gateway for the access point.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
Obtains DNS address automatically.
When set to On, the address of the DNS server is obtained automatically.
000
5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu
Item
Primary DNS
Server
Secondary DNS
Server
Submit
Description
Enter the primary DNS server for the access point.
Enabled only when DNS Auto is
[Off].
Enter the secondary DNS server for the access point.
Enabled only when DNS Auto is
[Off].
Applies the wireless LAN settings.
Connecting to an access point in station mode without using WPS
1
Connect the camcorder and device using
2
Configure settings on the Station Settings screen.
Configure settings to match the settings of the access point connection.
For details about access point settings, refer to the instruction manual for the access point.
3
Tap [Submit].
The specified settings are applied.
4
Select Maintenance >Network >Wireless
Network in the setup menu.
5
Turn the MENU knob to select [Wi-Fi Station], then press the knob.
This step connects the camcorder to the access point in station mode. Proceed to step
9
in “Connecting to an access point using WPS”
(page 60) to access the camcorder from the
device.
Checking wireless LAN settings
Use the Wireless LAN >Status tab to monitor the wireless LAN status.
The displayed settings will vary depending on the wireless LAN mode of the camcorder.
Access point mode
Station mode
Wired LAN Settings
Use this screen to make settings for connecting the camcorder to a wired LAN.
Item
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet mask
Gateway
DNS Auto
Primary DNS
Server
Secondary DNS
Server
Web/Cam
Remote
Submit
Description
Enables/disables DHCP.
When set to [On], an IP address is automatically assigned to the camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP address manually, set to [Off].
Enter the IP address of the camcorder.
Enabled when DHCP is [Off].
Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder. Enabled when
DHCP is [Off].
Enter the gateway for the access point.
Enabled when DHCP is [Off].
Obtains DNS address automatically.
When set to On, the address of the DNS server is obtained automatically.
Enter the primary DNS server of the router.
Enabled when DNS Auto is [Off].
Enter the secondary DNS server of the router.
Enabled when DNS Auto is [Off].
Enables/disables access to the camcorder web menu and Wi-Fi remote control.
When set to On, access is permitted.
Sets the wired LAN settings.
[Note]
To prevent unauthorized access from the Internet, it is recommended that Web/Cam Remote be set to On only when the wired LAN network is not connected to the
Internet. When connecting to the Internet, check that the network connection is a secure network before use.
Checking wired LAN settings
Use the Wired LAN >Status tab to monitor the wired LAN status.
Transfer (Upload) Settings
You can register and set servers for transferring proxy files or original files recorded on the camcorder.
Auto transfer ON/OFF
If [Auto upload] is [On] and an Internet connection exists, proxy files are automatically transferred to the default server specified on the Upload Settings tab when recording ends.
The default server is set to “Sony Ci” by factory default.
“Sony Ci” is the Media Cloud Services provided by
Sony. You can transfer files to the “Sony Ci” cloud service.
000
5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu
[Notes]
ˎ A subscription is required in order to use the “Sony Ci” cloud service. For details, visit www.SonyMCS.com/ wireless.
ˎ The name of the transfer destination folder is specified in
[Destination Directory]. If not specified, a folder name with
Use the following procedure to register with “Sony
Ci.”
1
Check that “Sony Ci” is displayed on the
[Upload Settings] tab, then click [Edit].
The “Sony Ci” setup screen appears.
2
Enter a user name and password.
For details, visit www.SonyMCS.com/wireless.
3
Tap [Link].
A completion message appears after a short while.
[Link] associates the user with the camcorder.
An Internet connection is required to execute
[Link].
4
Tap [OK].
After registering with “Sony Ci,” [Unlink] appears on the Settings screen. Tapping
[Unlink] releases the user account to enable other user accounts to link with the camcorder.
To register a new destination server
Tap [Create New] to display a configuration screen.
After specifying settings, tap [OK] to apply the settings. Tapping [Cancel] discards the settings.
Item
Default Server
Display Name
Service
Host Name
Description
Set to [On] to set the default file destination server.
(Displayed at the top of the server list for file transfers.)
Enter the name of the server to display in the list.
Displays the type of server.
FTP: FTP server
Enter the address of the server.
User
Password
PASV Mode
Destination
Directory
Using Secure
Protocol
Enter the user name.
Enter the password.
Enable/disable PASV mode.
Specify the destination directory.
[Note]
If an invalid character is entered in the directory name, the directory is not created and files are transferred to the top level of the default transfer destination directory.
Set whether to use secure FTP.
[Note]
Communication using FTP is not encrypted. The use of FTPS is recommended.
To change registered server settings
Select the server whose settings you want to change on the Upload Settings screen, then tap [Edit]. Change the setting on the displayed configuration screen.
For details about items, see “To register a new destination server”.
Deleting a registered server
Select the server you want to delete on the Upload
Settings screen, then tap [Delete]. A confirmation message appears. Tap [OK] to delete the server and return to the previous screen.
To stop/restart file transfer or delete a file from the transfer list
1
Select a file.
2
Tap on the top right of the screen.
Select a menu item.
ˎ Abort selected: Stop file transfer.
ˎ transfer list.
ˎ Start selected: Start file transfer.
ˎ
ˎ Clear completed: Delete all files that have been transferred from the list.
Monitoring File Transfers (Job List)
You can monitor file transfer status, manage files in the transfer file list, and start/stop file transfers.
The camcorder supports the FTP resume function
(for continuing file transfer if transfer stops).
Item
Total
Description
Progress status of the transfer of all files
Status
Remain time
Progress status of the file being transferred
Predicted remaining transfer time
Transfer data rate Transfer rate
000
5. Network Configuration
Supported Network Functions and Operating Limitations
Network Functions and Network Connection Settings Limitations on Simultaneous Use of Network Functions
The supported network functions and corresponding network connection settings (Maintenance
>Network >Wireless Network and Wired LAN settings) are shown below.
To enable the network functions, set Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup menu to On.
Network function Maintenance >Network>Wireless Network in the setup menu
Wi-Fi Access Point Wi-Fi Station Modem Off
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Maintenance >Network
>Wired LAN in the setup menu
Enable Disable
Yes Yes Proxy recording 1)
Proxy playback
File transfer
Streaming transmission
Monitoring
Network client mode
Camcorder remote control
Yes
2)
No
No
Yes
2)
No
Yes
2)
Yes
2)
Yes
2)
Yes
Yes
2)
Yes
Yes
2)
No
Yes
2)
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
2)
Yes
2)
Yes
Yes
2)
Yes
Yes
2)
No
No
No
No
No
No
1) Proxy recording is enabled when Operation >Proxy Recording Mode> Setting in the setup menu is set to On.
2) Supports camcorder and network-connected device functions.
The following limitations apply to the simultaneous use of network functions.
Wireless LAN connection
None
USB wireless LAN module
3G/4G/LTE USB modem
None
USB wireless LAN module
Wired LAN connection
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation
Network function stopped
USB wireless LAN module operating
3G/4G/LTE USB modem operating
Wired LAN operating
USB wireless LAN module and wired LAN operating
1)
1) Streaming and file transfer operate using wired LAN. The USB wireless LAN module is reserved for Wi-Fi remote control operation.
[Note]
Wired LAN connection is not possible when the USB extension adaptor of the CBK-NA1R Ethernet Adaptor, supplied with the
CBK-NA1 (option), is attached to the USB wireless LAN module on the camcorder.
000
6. Clip Operations
Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
Thumbnail Screen
Cursor
(yellow)
1 2 3 4 5
OK S
6 7 8
9
The thumbnail screen appears if you press the
THUMBNAIL button in E-E or playback mode.
Thumbnail screens display lists of the index pictures of clips stored on SxS memory cards as thumbnails.
You can select any clip (page 76) on the
thumbnail screen and start playback of that clip
You can also add a clip flag to any clip on the thumbnail screen to filter clips according to the flags. You can also switch to the Essence Mark thumbnail screen from the thumbnail screen and add essence marks (for example, shot marks) to any frame in the clip.
10 11
To hide the thumbnail screen, press the
THUMBNAIL button.
1.
Thumbnail (index picture)
When a clip is recorded, its first frame is automatically displayed as the index picture.
You can change the index picture to any frame
2.
Selected media icon/media status
A mark is displayed if the media is protected.
If two SxS memory cards are inserted in the camcorder, you can switch between them using the SLOT SELECT button.
12 13
[Note]
You cannot switch between SxS memory cards while the
Essence Mark thumbnail screen is displayed.
3.
Clip number / total number of clips
4.
Battery / Voltage status
5.
Playback disabled indicator
6.
Clip status
Displays the clips status using an icon.
Icon
S, OK, NG, KP icons
Lock icon
Meaning
Essence mark or clip flag attached to a clip
Clip is locked (protected)
7.
Clip select checkbox
Place a check mark in the checkbox to select a clip
(thumbnail).
8.
Thumbnail information
Displays thumbnail information. The displayed information varies according to the Customize
9.
Clip name / title
Displays the name or title of the selected clip.
10.
Recording video format
11.
Special recording information
Displays the recording mode if the clip was recorded using a special recording mode (Slow &
000
6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
Quick Motion).
For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the [Recording frame rate/Playback frame rate] are displayed on the right.
12.
Clip duration
13.
Creation date
Selecting Clips
To select a clip thumbnail, do one of the following to move the yellow cursor to the thumbnail that you want to select.
ˎ Press the , , , buttons.
ˎ Turn the MENU knob.
ˎ
Selecting the First Thumbnail
Press and hold the F REV button, and press the
PREV button.
Selecting the Last Thumbnail
Press and hold the F FWD button, and press the
NEXT button.
Playing Clips Sequentially Starting from the Selected Clip
Playing at High Speed
1
Select the thumbnail of the clip that you want to play first.
2
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
Playback begins from the start of the selected clip.
It plays all clips sequentially starting from the selected clip.
After the last clip has been played, the camcorder enters pause (still image) mode at the last frame of the last clip.
Press the THUMBNAIL button to return to the thumbnail screen.
[Notes]
ˎ Not all clips may be played back sequentially if the clips on the SxS memory cards were recorded with a mixture of different recording formats.
ˎ Clips with an playback disabled icon (page 75)
displayed on the thumbnail screen are not played. The corresponding clips are skipped and sequential playback continues.
ˎ There may be momentary picture breakup or still image display at the boundary between clips. During this time, the play controls and the THUMBNAIL button cannot be operated.
ˎ When you select a clip in the thumbnail screen and begin playback, there may be momentary picture breakup at the start of the clip. To view the start of the clip without breakup, put the camcorder into playback mode, pause, use the PREV button to return to the start of the clip, and start play again.
Press the F FWD button (page 8) or the F REV
To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/
PAUSE button.
Returning to the Start of the Current
Clip
Press the PREV button.
ˎ start of the current clip and starts playback.
ˎ During F REV or pause, this jumps to the start of the current clip and displays a still image.
ˎ Each subsequent press of the button moves to the previous clip.
Playing from the Start of the First Clip
Simultaneously press the PREV and F REV buttons.
This jumps to the start of the first clip on the SxS memory card.
Jumping to the Start of the Next Clip
Pausing Playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes while play is paused.
Press the button again to return to play mode.
Press the NEXT button.
ˎ During playback or F FWD, this jumps to the start of the next clip and starts playback.
ˎ During F REV or pause, this jumps to the start of the next clip and displays a still image.
ˎ Each subsequent press of the button moves to the next clip.
Jumping to the Last Clip
Simultaneously press the F FWD and NEXT buttons. This jumps to the last frame of the last clip recorded on the SxS memory card.
Adding a Shot Mark during Playback
You can add shot marks to clips during playback by using the same method used during recording
[Notes]
ˎ Shot marks cannot be recorded when the SxS memory card is write protected.
ˎ Shot marks cannot be added to the first frame of each clip or the last frame of the last clip.
Stopping Playback
Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and the camcorder enters E-E mode.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback stops and
the thumbnail screen (page 75) appears in
the viewfinder.
Play also stops if you eject the memory card. In this case, the camera picture appears in the viewfinder.
000
6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
Basic Thumbnail Menu Operations
The Thumbnail menu is used to protect/delete clips, check properties, add/delete clip flags and essence marks to frames in a clip, and other tasks.
1
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears.
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or press the MENU button.
The menu screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Thumbnail], then press the knob.
You can also press the or button to select
[Thumbnail], and press the SET button.
To hide the Thumbnail menu, press the MENU button again.
To select a menu item/sub-item, do one of the following.
ˎ Turn the MENU knob to select an item or subitem, then press the knob.
ˎ Press the arrow buttons (, , , ) to select an item or sub-item, then press the SET button.
A selection list or a clip properties screen appears
(page 78) according to the selected item or
sub-item.
To return to the previous screen, push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE position.
[Notes]
ˎ When an SxS memory card is write protected, it is not possible to copy, delete, change index pictures, or add and delete clip flags marks and shot marks.
ˎ Some items cannot be selected, depending on the state when the menu was displayed.
For details about the thumbnail screen structure,
see “Thumbnail Menu” (page 80).
Protecting Clips
You can protect a specified clip or all clips to protect the clips from being deleted.
is added to the thumbnails of protected clips.
Clips can be protected on the thumbnail screen or
the filtered clip thumbnail screen (page 79).
Protecting a specific clip
1
Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Select
Clip in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
The clip selection screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to protect, then press the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected clip.
4
Simultaneously press the SET button and SHIFT button.
A confirmation screen appears.
5
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
The clip is protected, and a completion message appears.
6
Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
Protecting all clips
1
Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Lock All
Clips in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
All clips are protected, and a completion message appears.
4
Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
Unlocking all clips
1
Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Unlock
All Clips in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
All clips are unlocked, and a completion message appears.
4
Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
Copying Clips
You can copy clips to another SxS memory card.
Clips are copied to destination SxS memory cards using the same names as the original clips.
[Notes]
ˎ If a clip with the same name already exists at the copy destination SxS memory card, a one-digit number in parentheses is added to the original name.
The number in parentheses is the smallest number that does not exist at the copy destination.
Example:
ABCD0002ABCD0002(1)
ABCD0002(1)ABCD0002(2)
ˎ
ABCD0005(3)ABCD0005(4)
ˎ If the parenthetical numbers (1) to (999) already exist at the copy destination, because a clip has been copied more than 1000 times, it is not possible to copy any more clips under that name.
ˎ A message appears if there is not enough free space on the copy destination SxS memory card.
ˎ
Exchange the card for one with more free space.
ˎ When multiple clips are recorded on the source
SxS memory card, it may not be possible to copy all clips even when the source and destination memory cards have the same capacity, depending on the memory characteristics and usage of the memory cards.
Copying a specific clip
1
Select Thumbnail >Copy Clip >Select Clip in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
The clip selection screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to copy, then press the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected clip.
4
Simultaneously press the SET button and SHIFT button.
A confirmation screen appears.
000
6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
5
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
The clip is copied, and a completion message appears.
6
Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
Copying all clips
You can copy all clips stored on the same SxS memory card at the same time to another SxS memory card.
1
Select Thumbnail >Copy Clip >All Clips in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
All clips are copied, and a completion message appears.
4
Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
Deleting Clips
You can delete clips from SxS memory cards. Clips can be deleted on the thumbnail screen or the
filtered clip thumbnail screen (page 79).
1
Select Thumbnail >Delete Clip >Select Clip in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
The clip selection screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to delete, then press the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected clip.
4
Simultaneously press the SET button and SHIFT button.
A confirmation screen appears.
5
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
The clip is deleted, and a completion message appears.
6
Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
The clips below the deleted clip on the thumbnail screen move up one position.
Deleting all clips
You can delete all clips stored on the same SxS memory card at the same time.
[Notes]
ˎ Deleted clips cannot be restored.
ˎ If the media or clip is protected, this function is disabled.
1
Select Thumbnail >Delete Clip >All Clips in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
All clips are deleted, and a completion message appears.
4
Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
Displaying Clip Properties
The clip properties screen for the selected clip appears when you select Thumbnail >Display Clip
Properties in the setup menu.
1
2
3
OK S
1.
Current clip image
Displays the index picture and status of the selected clip.
2.
Timecode display
TC Index: Timecode of the displayed image
Start: Timecode of the recording start point
End: Timecode of the recording end point
Duration: Duration between start and end points
3.
Creation date and modified date
4.
Clip name
5.
Recording format
Video Codec: Video codec
Size: Picture size
FPS: Frame rate
Audio Codec: Audio codec
Ch/Bit: Audio recording channel/Number of bits for audio recording
6.
Special recording information
7.
Recording device name
To hide the clip properties screen, do one of the following.
4
5
Press the RESET/RETURN button: Returns to the
Thumbnail menu screen.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Sets the camcorder to E-E mode and displays the camera picture.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button: Starts playback of the selected clip.
Adding Clip Flags to Clips
You can add clip flags (OK, NG or KP marks) to clips to filter the display of clips based on the clip flags.
You can perform this operation on the thumbnail screen or the filtered clip thumbnail screen
1
Select the thumbnail for the clip to which you want to add the clip flag, then select
Thumbnail >Set Clip Flag in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select a clip flag, then press the knob.
000
6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
Setting
Add OK
Add NG
Add KEEP
Added clip flag
OK
NG
KP
The clip flag is added to the thumbnail of the selected clip.
You can also use an assignable switch assigned with the clip flag function to add clip flags
Deleting a Clip Flag
1
Select the thumbnail for the clip from which you want to delete a clip flag, then select
Thumbnail >Set Clip Flag >Delete Clip Flag in the setup menu.
The clip flag is deleted.
Filtering the Clips Displayed using the
Filtered Clip Screen
1
Select Thumbnail >Filter Clips in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select a clip flag used to filter clips, then press the knob.
Setting
OK
NG
KEEP
None
Filter clip flag
OK
NG
KP
(Clips are not filtered)
The clip screen appears showing the clips filtered by the selected clip flag. This screen is referred to as the filtered clip screen.
To cancel filtering, do one of the following.
ˎ Press the RESET/RETURN button.
ˎ setup menu.
Adding/Deleting Essence Marks on
Clips
You can add (and delete) essence marks (shot marks, recording start marks) to any frame in a clip.
You add/delete essence marks on the essence mark thumbnail screen.
Adding a shot mark
1
Select Thumbnail > Thumbnail View > Essence
Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [All], and then press the knob.
3
Select the thumbnail for the frame to which you want to add the essence mark on the essence mark thumbnail screen, then select
Thumbnail >Set Shot Mark in the setup menu.
4
Turn the MENU knob to select one of the following, then press the knob.
Setting
Add Shot Mark1
Add Shot Mark2
Operation
Adds Shot Mark 1
Adds Shot Mark 2
The shot mark is added to the selected frame.
Deleting a shot mark
1
Select Thumbnail > Thumbnail View > Essence
Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu.
2
Select the type of shot mark to delete.
3
Select the thumbnail for the frame from which you want to delete a shot mark on the essence mark thumbnail screen, then select Thumbnail
>Set Shot Mark in the setup menu.
4
Turn the MENU knob to select one of the following, then press the knob.
Setting Operation
Delete Shot Mark1 Deletes Shot Mark 1
Delete Shot Mark2 Deletes Shot Mark 2
The shot mark is deleted from the selected frame.
Filtering Clips (Frames) using the
Essence Mark Thumbnail Screen
The essence mark thumbnail screen displays only those frames in a clip where an essence mark has been recorded in thumbnail view. Display the thumbnail screen, then either press the ESSENCE
MARK button (page 9) or use the following
procedure to display the essence mark thumbnail screen.
1
Select Thumbnail >Thumbnail View >Essence
Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select an essence mark used to filter frames, then press the knob.
Setting
All
Rec Start
Description
All frames with added essence marks
Frames with a recording start mark and the first frame of clips that do not have a recording start mark
Frames with each shot mark Shot Mark0 to
Shot Mark9
The essence mark thumbnail screen appears filtered by the selected essence mark.
If a clip is recorded using planning metadata that defines names for shot mark 0 to shot mark 9, the selection options in the list are displayed by the defined names.
Changing the Index Picture of a Clip
You can set the frame selected on the essence mark thumbnail screen as the index picture for the clip.
Select the thumbnail of the frame you want to set as the index picture for the clip, then select
Thumbnail >Set Index Picture in the setup menu.
000
6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
Thumbnail Menu
Default values are shown in bold.
Item
Display Clip Properties
Sub-item setting
–
Set Index Picture
Thumbnail View
Changes the thumbnail screen displayed.
Set Shot Mark
Adds/deletes shot marks.
Description
Displays clip properties (page 78).
–
Essence Mark Thumbnail
All/Rec Start/Shot Mark1/Shot
Mark2/Shot Mark3/Shot Mark4/
Shot Mark5/Shot Mark6/Shot
Mark7/Shot Mark8/Shot Mark9/
Shot Mark0
Clip Thumbnail
Add Shot Mark1
Sets/changes the index picture of a clip
Displays the essence mark thumbnail screen
with clips filtered by essence mark (page 79).
Displays the thumbnail screen (clip thumbnail
Adds Shot Mark 1 to a frame (page 79).
Delete Shot Mark1
Deletes Shot Mark 1 (page 79).
Set Clip Flag
Adds/deletes clip flags.
Lock/Unlock Clip
Protects/unlocks a clip.
Copy Clip
Copies clips.
Delete Clip
Deletes clips.
Add Shot Mark2
Delete Shot Mark2
Add OK
Add NG
Add KEEP
Delete Clip Flag
Select Clip
Lock All Clips
Unlock All Clips
Select Clip
All Clips
Select Clip
All Clips
Adds Shot Mark 2 to a frame (page 79).
Deletes Shot Mark 2 (page 79).
Adds an OK flag to a clip (page 78).
Adds an NG flag to a clip (page 78).
Adds a KP (Keep) flag to a clip (page 78).
Deletes a clip flag (page 79).
Selects the clip to protect (page 77).
Protects all clips on the media (page 77).
Unlocks all clips on the media (page 77).
Selects the clip to copy (page 77).
Copies all clips on the media (page 78).
Selects the clip to delete (page 78).
Deletes all clips on the media (page 78).
Item
Filter Clips
Filters the display of clips by clip flag.
Sub-item setting
OK
NG
Customize View
KEEP
None
Thumbnail Caption
Date Time/
Time Code
/
Duration/Sequential
Number
Description
Filters the display of clips by OK flags
Filters the display of clips by NG flags
Filters the display of clips by KP (Keep) flags
Clips are not filtered (page 79).
Selects the information displayed beneath clip thumbnails.
Date Time: Displays the date and time.
Time Code: Displays the timecode.
Duration: Displays the duration of the clip.
Sequential Number: Displays a sequential number for each clip.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings
Setup Menu Organization
On this camcorder, settings for shooting and playback are made in the setup menu, which appears in the viewfinder.
The setup menu can also be displayed on an
external video monitor (page 122).
Menu Structure
User menu
Menu used to arrange items from the setup
menu in any chosen order (page 85).
Operation menu
Menu used to make settings related to shooting (excluding settings related to picture quality).
Paint menu
Menu used to make settings related to picture quality.
Thumbnail menu
Menu used to make settings related to clip
[Note]
The Thumbnail menu can be used only when a
thumbnail screen (page 75) is displayed. It is disabled
when the thumbnail screen is not displayed.
Maintenance Menu
Menu used to make settings related to camcorder maintenance and system management.
File menu
Menu used to make perform operations on files.
Menu Items
Operation menu
Item Description
Format System settings
Format Media Media format settings
Page
Input/Output Input/output signal settings
Super Impose Superimposition settings
LCD
Rec Function
LCD monitor settings
Special recording mode settings
Proxy data settings Proxy Recording
Mode
Assignable
Switch
VF Setting
Assign functions to assignable switches
Viewfinder settings
Marker
Gain Switch
Auto Iris
Zebra
Marker settings
Gain value settings
Auto iris settings
Zebra pattern settings
Display On/Off Viewfinder display item settings
“!” LED Viewfinder “!” settings
White Setting
Offset White
Shutter
Slow Shutter
White balance settings
Offset white settings
Shutter settings
Slow shutter settings
Time Zone
Clip
Time settings
Clip settings
Update Media Update media management information
GPS Location information
(GPS) settings
Item
Planning
Metadata
Flash Band
Reduce
Description
Planning metadata settings
Flashband correction settings
Page
Paint menu
Item
Switch Status
White
Black
Description
Correction functions and test signal on/off settings
Color temperature settings
Black level settings
Flare
Gamma
Flare correction settings
Gamma correction settings
Black Gamma Black gamma correction settings
Knee
White Clip
Knee correction settings
White clip settings
Page
Detail(HD)
Detail(SD)
Aperture
Skin Detail
Matrix
Multi Matrix
V Modulation
Low Key
Saturation
Saturation
Mode
Noise
Suppression
Detail settings
Detail settings
Aperture correction settings
Skin detail correction settings
Matrix correction settings
Multi matrix correction settings
V modulation shading correction settings
Low key saturation correction settings
Saturation correction settings
Noise suppression settings
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Setup Menu Organization
Maintenance menu
Item Description
White Shading White shading correction settings
Black Shading Black shading correction settings
Battery Battery settings
DC Voltage
Alarm
Audio
WRR Setting
External DC source voltage alarm settings
Audio settings
Wireless tuner settings
Page
Time Code
Essence Mark
Camera Config Camcorder operation
Preset White
Timecode settings
Essence mark settings settings
Preset white settings
White Filter
DCC Adjust
Filter settings
DCC settings
Flicker Reduce Flicker correction settings
Genlock Genlock settings
Auto Shading Auto black shading correction settings
APR
Basic
Authentication
Network
Network Client
Mode
File Transfer
Streaming
APR settings
Basic authentication settings
Network connection settings
Network client mode settings
Wi-Fi transfer settings
Streaming settings
Clock Set
Language
Internal clock settings
Display language settings
Hours Meter Digital time counter settings
Network Reset Network reset
Item
Fan Control
VF Display
Setting
Version
Description
Fan control settings
Viewfinder display settings
Version settings
Page
File menu
Item
User File
Description
User file settings
All File ALL file settings
Scene File Scene file settings
Reference File Reference file settings
Lens File
User Gamma
Lens file settings
Gamma file settings
Page
000
7. Menu Display and Settings
Basic Setup Menu Operations
Displaying the Setup Menu
ˎ The menu item selection area displays a maximum of seven lines. You can scroll through menus with more than seven lines by moving the cursor up and down.
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or press the
MENU button.
The camcorder enters menu mode and the menu list appears on the screen.
The following example shows the cursor positioned at the Operation menu
Menu list
Menu item selection area
[Note]
The setup menu cannot be used when the camcorder is in focus magnification mode. Exit focus magnification mode by pressing the assignable switch to which the Focus Mag function has been assigned.
Displayed when there are further menu items below.
Menu item selection area
ˎ they appear on the right.
ˎ If there are no sub-items, the current setting appears on the right.
ˎ Select [Back] to return to the previous level.
3
Turn the MENU knob, or press the or button, to move the cursor to the menu item that you want to set, and then confirm by pressing the MENU knob or the SET button.
The sub-items area appears to the right of the menu item selection area, and the cursor moves to the first sub-item.
Making Menu Settings
1
Turn the MENU knob, or press the or button, to move the cursor to the desired menu.
A list of selectable menu items appears in the menu item selection area to the right of the menu list.
2
Press the MENU knob or the SET button.
The menu item selection screen appears.
You can also display the menu item selection screen by pressing the button.
Settings area
ˎ
ˎ press the button, or push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the
ESCAPE position.
4
Turn the MENU knob, or press the or button, to move the cursor to the sub-item that you want to set, and then confirm by pressing the MENU knob or the SET button.
The settings of the selected sub-item appear, and the cursor moves to the currently selected value.
Entering Text
When you select an item, such as a file name, which requires character entry, the character entry screen appears.
1
Settings area
ˎ The settings area displays a maximum of nine lines. You can scroll through menus with more than nine sub-items by moving
ˎ the cursor up and down.
ˎ For sub-items with a large settings range (for example, –99 to +99), the settings area is not displayed. The current setting is highlighted to indicate that the value can be changed.
5
Turn the MENU knob, or press the or button, to select the value to set, and then confirm by pressing the MENU knob or the SET button.
The setting is changed, and the display is updated to show the new setting.
If you select [Execute] for an executable item, the corresponding function is executed.
If an item requires confirmation before execution, selecting the item in step
3
hides the menu and a confirmation message appears. Follow the instructions in the message to execute or cancel the operation.
2 3
1
Press the MENU knob to select the type of character to enter, then press the MENU knob or SET button.
ABC: Uppercase alphabetic characters abc: Lowercase alphabetic characters
123: Numeric characters
!#$: Special characters
2
Select a character from the selected character type, then press the knob.
The cursor moves to the next field.
Space: Enters a space character at the cursor position.
/: Moves the position of the cursor.
BS: Deletes the character on the left of the cursor (backspace).
3
When finished, select [Done] and press the dial.
The character string is confirmed and the character entry screen disappears.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Basic Setup Menu Operations
Canceling Changes to Settings
1
Push the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE position.
Exiting the Menu
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or press the MENU button.
The normal camera picture reappears.
Locking/Unlocking the Menu
4
Enter an arbitrary passcode number.
The valid input range is 0000 to 9999. The default value is 0000.
Enter a number and press the MENU knob to move the cursor to the next digit.
When all digits have been entered, move the cursor to [Set].
5
With [Set] selected, press the MENU knob.
The entry is applied.
A confirmation message appears.
Subsequently, only the User menu is displayed.
Unlocking the menu
1
Press and hold the MENU knob and press the
MENU ON/OFF switch down to display the setup menu.
2
Display User >Camera Config >User Menu with Lock in the setup menu.
5
With [Set] selected, press the MENU knob.
The entry is applied.
If the entered passcode number matches the passcode number used to lock the menu, a confirmation message appears and the display of all menus is enabled.
[Notes]
ˎ If the entered passcode number does not match the passcode number used to lock the menu, the menu is not unlocked.
ˎ It is recommended that you leave a record of the passcode nearby, just in case it is forgotten. If you do forget the passcode number, contact your Sony service representative.
You can lock the setup menu so that only the User menu is displayed.
Locking the menu
1
Press and hold the MENU knob and press the
MENU ON/OFF switch down to display the setup menu.
2
Display Maintenance >Camera Config >User
Menu with Lock in the setup menu.
[Notes]
ˎ When you press and hold the MENU knob and press the MENU ON/OFF switch down, Camera Config
>User Menu Only changes to User Menu with Lock.
ˎ If you press the MENU ON/OFF switch down without pressing the MENU knob or you press the MENU button to display the menu, Camera Config >User
Menu with Lock is not displayed.
3
Select “On,” then press the MENU knob.
The viewfinder screen display switches to the passcode number input screen.
[Notes]
ˎ When you press and hold the MENU knob and press the MENU ON/OFF switch down, Camera Config
ˎ
>User Menu Only changes to User Menu with Lock.
ˎ If you press the MENU ON/OFF switch down without pressing the MENU knob or you press the MENU button to display the menu, Camera Config >User
Menu with Lock is not displayed.
3
Select “Off,” then press the MENU knob.
The viewfinder screen display switches to the passcode number input screen.
4
Enter the passcode number used to lock the menu.
The valid input range is 0000 to 9999.
Enter a number and press the MENU knob to move the cursor to the next digit.
When all digits have been entered, move the cursor to [Set].
000
7. Menu Display and Settings
Editing the User Menu
You can edit the User menu, such as adding items, deleting items, and rearranging items, to make the
User menu more useful using Edit User Menu.
You can select any item in the Operation menu,
Paint menu, or Maintenance menu and add it to the User menu.
Up to 20 items can be registered in the User menu.
There are six items registered in the User menu by factory default, one of which must always be present, allowing you to add up to 19 new items.
[Note]
Editing is unavailable when the menu is locked.
Adding Items and Sub-Items
1
Turn the MENU knob to select Edit User Menu
>Add Item, then press the knob.
The items that can be added are displayed.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select an item, then press the knob.
A screen for selecting sub-items to add appears.
Displaying the Edit User Menu Screen
You edit the User menu on the Edit User Menu screen.
1
Turn the MENU knob to select User >Edit User
Menu, then press the knob.
The Edit User Menu screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select an item to edit, then press the knob.
The edit function list appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select Edit Sub Item in the edit function list, then press the knob.
The item is deleted.
Moving Items
The Edit Sub Item screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select a sub-item, then press the knob.
Place a check mark in the All checkbox to add all sub-items.
Place a check mark in the individual checkboxes to specify which sub-items to add.
4
Turn the MENU knob to select [OK], then press the knob.
The item/sub-item(s) are added.
[Note]
The same item or sub-item cannot be registered twice. Also, the name of the item or sub-item cannot be changed.
All sub-items are checked when the screen is first opened (function to display all sub-items).
Remove the check marks for the sub-items you do not want to display in the User menu.
4
Turn the MENU knob to select [OK], then press the knob.
Editing is completed.
Deleting Items
1
Display the Edit User Menu screen.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select an item to move, then press the knob.
The edit function list appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select Move in the edit function list, then press the knob.
The item to move is highlighted, and a triangle mark and line indicate the destination position.
Editing Sub-Items
You can specify the sub-items to display.
1
Display the Edit User Menu screen.
1
Display the Edit User Menu screen.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select an item to edit, then press the knob.
The edit function list appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select Delete in the edit function list, then press the knob.
Triangle mark and line indicating move destination
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Editing the User Menu
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the triangle and line to the desired destination, then press the knob.
The item is moved.
Restoring the User Menu to Factory
Default State
1
Turn the MENU knob to select Edit User Menu
>Customize Reset, then press the knob.
The Customize Reset screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Reset], then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
The User menu is restored to the factory default state.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings
Menu List
User Menu (Factory Default Configuration)
The User menu consists of the following items when it is in the factory default state.
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ Assignable Switch
ˎ Camera Config
2)
1)
1) Excluding sub-item 0
2) Contains only User Menu Only as sub-item
For details about editing the User menu, see “Editing the User Menu” (page 85).
Operation Menu
Default values are shown in bold .
Operation >Format
Sets the system frequency, recording mode, recording format, and recording aspect ratio.
Item
Frequency
File System
Setting
59.94
/50/29.97/25/23.98
exFAT /UDF
Description
Selects the system frequency (execute by selecting Execute).
Switches the recording mode between exFAT and
UDF (execute by selecting Execute)
Operation >Format
Sets the system frequency, recording mode, recording format, and recording aspect ratio.
Item
Rec Format
Setting
Settings vary according to the system frequency setting.
Description
Selects the recording format (execute by selecting
Execute).
When the file system is exFAT and the system frequency is 59.94 or 50.
Aspect Ratio (SD)
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
XAVC-I 1280×720P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080i
XAVC-L 25 1080i
HD422 50 1080i
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
MPEG IMX 50
DVCAM
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080P
HD422 50 1080i
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
MPEG IMX 50
DVCAM
HD422 50 1080P
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080P
16:9 /4:3
When the file system is exFAT and the system frequency is 29.97, 25, or 23.98.
When the file system is UDF and the system frequency is 59.94 or 50.
When the file system is UDF and the system frequency is 29.97, 25, or 23.98.
Selects the SD mode aspect ratio.
Audio Length 24bit/ 16bit Selects the audio bit rate for recording in IMX format.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Operation >Format Media
Formats the media.
Item
Media (A)
Media (B)
SD Card(Utility)
SD Card(Proxy)
Setting
Execute/Cancel
Execute/Cancel
Execute/Cancel
Execute/Cancel
Description
Initializes the SxS memory card in slot A (execute by selecting Execute).
Initializes the SxS memory card in slot B (execute by selecting Execute).
Initializes the SD card in the UTILITY SD card slot
(execute by selecting Execute).
Initializes the SD card in the PROXY SD card slot
(execute by selecting Execute).
Operation >Input/Output
Sets input/output signals.
Item Setting Description
Output Format
Source Select
SDI Out1 Output
Settings vary according to the system frequency setting.
Camera
On /Off
/External
Selects the input format (execute by selecting
Execute).
Settings vary according to the recording format
Selects the camera picture (Camera) or SDI IN connector input signal for the video input source.
Turns the output signal from the SDI OUT1 connector on/off.
SDI Out2 Output
HDMI Output
SDI Out2/HDMI Super
Video Out Super
Down Converter
On
On
Off
/Off
/Off
/On
Turns the output signal from the SDI OUT2 connector on/off.
Turns the output signal from the HDMI connector on/off.
Turns character information (superimposed) from the SDI OUT2 connector on/off.
Off /On Turns character information (superimposed) from the VIDEO OUT connector on/off.
Edge Crop/Letter Box/ Squeeze Selects the signal conversion mode for output of
SD signals.
Edge Crop: Crops the edges of the 16:9 picture for output as a 4:3 picture.
Letter Box: Masks the top and bottom of the 4:3 picture and displays a 16:9 picture in the center of the screen.
Squeeze: Squeezes the 16:9 picture horizontally for output as a 4:3 picture.
Operation >Input/Output
Sets input/output signals.
Item
Wide ID
Wide Mode(Ext)
Setting
Through
Auto
/Auto
/16:9
Description
Selects whether to add a wide ID signal to the SD output signal.
Through: Outputs without adding a wide ID signal.
Auto: Adds and outputs a wide ID signal to the video signal when the wide ID signal is set to
Squeeze.
When the input signal is SD, sets the method that determines wide screen information.
Auto: Records with 16:9 aspect ratio when the wide screen information of the input signal is
Squeeze. Otherwise, records with 4:3 aspect ratio.
16:9: Records with 16:9 aspect ratio.
Operation >Super Impose
Sets character information/markers to be superimposed.
Item
Super(VF Display)
Super(Menu)
Setting
On
On
/Off
/Off
Super(Marker) On/ Off
Description
When Input/Output >SDI Out2/HDMI Super or
Input/Output >Video Out Super is set to On, this turns superimposition of character information on the output from the SDI OUT connector or VIDEO
OUT connector, respectively.
When Input/Output >SDI Out2/HDMI Super or
Input/Output >Video Out Super is set to On, this turns superimposition of markers on the output from the SDI OUT connector or VIDEO OUT connector on/off, respectively.
Operation >LCD
Sets the LCD monitor.
Item
LCD Color
LCD Marker&Zebra
Setting
–99 to
On
/Off
±0 to +99
Description
Adjusts the color depth of the LCD monitor.
Turns the marker and zebra pattern display on the
LCD monitor on/off.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Operation >Rec Function
Sets the special recording mode.
Item
Slow & Quick Motion
Frame Rate
Clip Continuous Rec
Picture Cache Rec
Cache Rec Time
Interval Rec
Setting
On/ Off
Settings vary according to the recording format setting.
1 to 60
1 to
50
1 to
1 to
On/
On/
30
25
Off
Off
0 to 2
/2 to 4/4 to 6/6 to 8/
8 to 10/10 to 12/12 to 14/
13 to 15sec
On/ Off
Settings vary according to the recording format setting.
0 to 2 /2 to 4sec
0 to 2 /2 to 4/4 to 6/6 to 8sec
Description
Turns Slow & Quick Motion on/off. (When set to
On, the settings for other special recording modes are set to Off.)
When Slow & Quick Motion is On, selects the frame rate for Slow & Quick Motion shooting.
When the recording mode is exFAT, and the recording format is XAVC Intra or XAVC Long.
When the recording mode is UDF, and the recording format is MPEG2 HD 422 50M
(1280×720), 50P/25P.
When the recording mode is exFAT or UDF, and the recording format is MPEG2 HD 422 50M
(1920×1080), 29.97P/23.98P.
When the recording mode is exFAT or UDF, and the recording format is MPEG2 HD 422 50M
(1920×1080), 25P.
Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off. (When set to On, the settings for other special recording modes are set to Off.)
Turns picture cache recording mode on/off.
(When set to On, the settings for other special recording modes are set to Off.)
Sets the picture cache recording time, when
Picture Cache Rec is set to On.
When the recording format is XAVC-I 1920×1080P
(system frequency is 59.94/50)
When the recording format is XAVC-I 1920×1080P
(system frequency is 29.97/25/23.98), XAVC-I
1920×1080i, or XAVC-I 1280×720P
When the recording format is XAVC-L, MPEG2 HD
422, MPEG2 HD 420, or MPEG IMX 50.
Turns Interval Rec mode on/off. (When set to On, the settings for other special recording modes are set to Off.)
Operation >Rec Function
Sets the special recording mode.
Item
Number of Frames
Interval Time
Setting
The available settings vary depending on the Format
>Frequency setting.
2frames /6frames/12frames
1frame/3frames/6frames/
9frames
1
/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/20/30/
40/50 (sec)
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/20/30/
40/50/ (min)
1/2/3/4/6/12/24 (hour)
Off
/2sec/5sec/10sec
Description
When Interval Rec is set to On, this sets the number of frames to shoot in one Interval Rec take.
When the recording format frame rate is 50P or
59.94P.
When the recording format frame rate is 23.98P,
25P, 29.97P, 50i, or 59.94i.
When Interval Rec is set to On, this sets the interval for Interval Rec shooting.
Pre-Lighting
Simul Rec On/ Off
Sets the number of seconds that the video light is turned on prior to the start of Interval Rec shooting. To not turn the video light on, select
Off.
Turns simultaneous recording to slots A and B on/ off.
Operation >Proxy Recording Mode
Sets proxy recording.
Item
Setting
Size
Frame Rate
Bit Rate
Audio Channel
Setting
On/
Off
1280×720(9Mbps)/
1280×720(6Mbps)/
640×360(3Mbps)
/
480×270(1Mbps)/
480×270(0.5Mbps)
23.98fps/25fps/29.97fps/50fps/
59.94fps
9Mbps/6Mbps/3Mbps/1Mbps/
0.5Mbps
CH1/CH2
/CH3/CH4
Description
Turns proxy recording on/off.
Selects the size of the proxy recording format.
Selects the frame rate of the proxy recording format.
Selects the bit rate of the proxy recording format.
Selects the audio channel to record to proxy data.
Operation >Assignable Switch
Assigns functions to assignable switches.
Item
<0>
<1>
For details about assigning functions, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 110).
Setting Description
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 0 switch.
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 1 switch.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Operation >Assignable Switch
Assigns functions to assignable switches.
Item
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
Lens RET
On Line
For details about assigning functions, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 110).
Setting
Description
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 2 switch.
Zoom Speed
0 to 20 to 99
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 3 switch.
Assigns a function to the ASSIGNABLE 4 switch.
Assigns a function to the ASSIGNABLE 5 switch.
Assigns a function to RET button on the lens.
Assigns a function to the ONLINE button.
When Zoom has been assigned to the
ASSIGNABLE 4 or 5 switch, this sets the zoom speed.
Operation >VF Setting
Sets the viewfinder screen.
Item
Color
Color Mode
Setting
–99 to
±0
to +99
Color/ B&W
Peaking Type
Peaking Frequency
Peaking Color
VF Detail Level
Normal
Normal
B&W /Red/Yellow/Blue
–99 to
/Color
/High
±0 to +99
Description
Adjusts the color depth of the viewfinder image.
Selects the viewfinder display mode (when using
CBK-VF02).
Color: Color
B&W: Black & white
Selects the type of peaking (when using CBK-
VF02).
Normal: Normal peaking
Color: Color peaking
When Peaking Type is set to Normal, this selects
Normal or High peaking frequency (when using
CBK-VF02).
Selects the peaking color when Peaking Type is set to Color (when using CBK-VF02).
B&W: Black & white
Red: Red
Yellow: Yellow
Blue: Blue
Sets the detail level (set on the camcorder) of the viewfinder (when using HDVF-20A).
Operation >Marker
Sets the marker display in the viewfinder.
Item
Setting
Setting
On /Off
Color
Center Marker
Safety Zone
Safety Area
Aspect Marker
Aspect Select
Aspect Mask
Aspect Safety Zone
Aspect Safety Area
100% Marker
User Box
User Box Width
User Box Height
User Box H Position
User Box V Position
White
80%/
0% to
/Yellow/Cyan/Green/
Magenta/Red/Blue
1/2/3/4/
On/ Off
Off
90% /92.5%/95%
Line/Mask/
12%
Off
15:9/14:9/13:9/
4:3
1.85:1/2.35:1/2.4:1
to 15%
On/ Off
80%/ 90% /92.5%/95%
On/ Off
On/ Off
40 to 500 to 999
70 to 500 to 999
–479 to 0 to 479
–464 to 0 to 464
/1.66:1/
Description
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
[Note]
When Marker is assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 switch, this setting is disabled.
Selects the marker display color.
When the center marker is displayed, selects the type. Select Off if you do not want to display the marker.
Turns the safety zone indicator on/off.
Selects the safety zone range.
When an aspect marker is to be displayed, selects the display method. Select Off if you do not want to display the marker.
Line: Show as white lines.
Mask: Displays a lower video signal level for areas outside the marker area.
Selects the aspect ratio of the marker.
When the Aspect Marker setting is Mask, this sets the video signal level of areas outside the marker area as a percentage value relative to the video signal level of areas inside the marker area.
Turns the aspect safety zone marker on/off.
Selects the size of the aspect safety zone marker
(as a percentage of total screen size).
Turns the 100% safety zone marker indicator on/ off.
Turns the box cursor display on/off.
Sets the box cursor width (distance from the center to the left and right edges).
Sets the box cursor height (distance from the center to the top and bottom edges).
Sets the horizontal position of the box cursor center.
Sets the vertical position of the box cursor center.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Operation >Gain Switch
Sets the gain value switch settings.
Item
Gain<L>
Gain<M>
Gain<H>
Gain <Turbo>
Shockless Gain
Setting
–3dB/ 0dB /3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
–3dB/0dB/3dB/ 6dB /9dB/12dB/
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/ 12dB /
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/
42dB
On/
Off
Description
Selects the gain value for the L position of the
GAIN switch.
Selects the gain value for the M position of the
GAIN switch.
Selects the gain value for the H position of the
GAIN switch.
Selects the gain value when the Turbo Gain function is assigned to an assignable switch.
Turns shockless gain (function that switches the gain smoothly when the gain is switched) on/off.
Operation >Auto Iris
Sets the auto iris.
Item
Iris Override
Setting
On/ Off
Mode
Level
Speed
Clip High light
Detect Window
Detect Window
Indication
Iris APL Ratio
Backlight/
–99 to
–99 to
On/
1 /2/3/4/5/6/Var
On/
Off
Off
–99 to
±0
±0
±0
Standard
to +99
to +99
to +99
/Spotlight
Description
Turns iris override (setting opens or closes the iris more than normal) on/off.
Selects the control mode of the auto iris.
Backlight: Backlight mode (mode for reduced darkening of a subject when the subject is backlit)
Standard: Standard mode (cannot be selected when using optional remote control connection)
Spotlight: Spotlight mode (mode for reduced blown out highlights when subject is lit by spotlighting)
Sets the convergence target level (larger values increase brightness.)
Sets the control speed (speed of response to changes in the video). (Larger values specify quicker reaction times.)
Turns the function that ignores brightest areas to provide a flatter reaction to high luminance on/ off.
Selects the type of auto iris detection window.
Var: Variable
Turns the function that displays the auto iris detection window frame using a marker on/off.
If the Mode setting for Auto Iris is set to Standard, sets the mix ratio of peak to mean auto iris detection value.
Operation >Auto Iris
Sets the auto iris.
Item
Iris Var Width
Iris Var Height
Iris Var H Position
Iris Var V Position
Setting
40 to 500 to 999
70 to 500 to 999
–479 to 0 to 479
–464 to 0 to 464
Operation >Zebra
Sets the display of zebra patterns.
Item
Zebra Select
Setting
1
/2/Both
Zebra1 Level 50% to 70% to 107%
Zebra1 Aperture Level 1 to 10% to 20%
Zebra2 Level 52% to 100% to 109%
Operation >Display On/Off
Selects the items to display in the viewfinder.
Item
Video Level Warning
Setting
On /Off
Shutter Setting
ND Filter Position
Gain Setting
Rec/Play Status
Color Temp.
Frame Rate/Interval
Battery Remain
On /Off
On
/Off
On /Off
On
/Off
On /Off
On /Off
Auto
/Voltage/Off
Description
Sets the width of the window when Iris Window is set to Var.
Sets the height of the window when Iris Window is set to Var.
Sets the horizontal position of the window when
Iris Window is set to Var.
Sets the vertical position of the window when Iris
Window is set to Var.
Description
Selects the zebra pattern type (Zebra 1, Zebra 2,
Both).
Sets the Zebra 1 display level.
Sets the Zebra 1 aperture level.
Sets the Zebra 2 display level.
Description
Turns the warnings that appear when the video level is too bright or too dark on/off.
Turns the shutter mode and shutter speed indicators on/off.
Turns the ND filter setting indicator on/off.
Turns the gain setting indicator on/off.
Turns the recording and playback indicators on/ off.
Turns the color temperature indicator on/off.
Turns the special recording mode indicator on/ off.
Sets the mode of the remaining battery capacity and input voltage indicators.
Auto: Displays the remaining capacity, according to the battery type.
Voltage: Displays the input voltage, regardless of the battery type.
Off: No display.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Operation >Display On/Off
Selects the items to display in the viewfinder.
Item
Timecode
Setting
On /Off
Description
Turns the display of time data (timecode, user bits, counter, duration) on/off.
Turns the display of the audio level meter on/off.
Audio Level Meter
Media Status
SD Card(Utility)
Focus Position
On /Off
On /Off
On /Off
Meter /Feet/Off
Turns the media status indicator on/off.
Turns the SD card (Utility) indicator on/off.
Iris Position
Zoom Position
Extender
On
/Off
On /Off
On
/Off
Turns the lens focus position indicator on/off and selects the display units.
Turns the lens iris position indicator on/off.
Turns the lens zoom position indicator on/off.
ALAC
AE Mode
On
On
/Off
/Off
On /Off
On /Off
On /Off
On /Off
Turns the lens and digital extender indicator on/ off.
Turns the lens aberration correction indicator on/ off.
Turns AE mode and the AE level setting indicator on/off.
Turns the focus mode indicator on/off.
Turns the white balance mode indicator on/off.
Focus Mode
White Balance Mode
CC5600K
Rec Format
Gamma
Timecode Lock
Network Condition
On /Off
On /Off
On /Off
Turns the CC5600K indicator on/off.
Turns the recording format indicator on/off.
Turns the selected gamma type indicator on/off.
Turns the timecode indicator on/off.
Proxy Status On /Off
NW Client Mode Status On /Off
Streaming Status
GPS
On
On
/Off
/Off
Turns the network connection status indicator on/ off.
Turns the proxy status indicator on/off.
Turns the network client mode indicator on/off.
Turns streaming transmission on/off.
Turns the GPS reception status indicator on/off.
Video Signal Monitor Off /Waveform/Vector/Histogram Selects whether to display the video signal, and the type of video signal to display.
Clip Name
Focus Assist Indicator
On
On/
/Off
Off
[Note]
Not displayed in the following circumstances.
When Operation >Input/Output >SDI Out1 Select and
SDI Out2 Select in the setup menu are both set to Off.
When Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup menu is set to 720×480P or 720×576P.
Turns the clip name display on/off.
Turns the focus assist indicator on/off.
Operation >Display On/Off
Selects the items to display in the viewfinder.
Item
Focus Area Marker
Lens Info
WRR RF Level
Clip Number
Setting
On/
On/
Off
Meter/Feet/
Off
On
/Off
Off
Description
Turns the focus area marker indicator on/off.
Selects whether to display depth of field and the units to display.
Turns the wireless tuner reception status indicator on/off.
Turns the clip information display on/off.
Operation >"!"LED
Sets the “!” indicator in the viewfinder. (Enabled when using HDVF-20A).
Item
Gain <!>
Shutter <!>
White Preset <!>
ATW Run <!>
Extender <!>
Filter <!>
Iris Override <!>
Setting
On
On
On
On
On
On/
On
/Off
/Off
/Off
/Off
/Off
Off
/Off
Description
Turns the function to light the ! indicator, when the gain is set to other than 0 dB, on/off.
Turns the function to light the ! indicator, when the SHUTTER switch is set to ON, on/off.
Turns the function to light the ! indicator, when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, on/off.
Turns the function to light the ! indicator, when
ATW is used, on/off.
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off, when the digital extender function or lens extender, is used.
Turns the function to light the ! indicator, when the ND filter is set to other than 1, on/off.
Turns the function to light the ! indicator, when the auto iris override is not set to Standard, on/off.
Operation >White Setting
Makes settings related to white balance adjustment.
Item
White Switch<B>
Setting
Memory /ATW
Shockless White
ATW Speed
AWB Fixed Area
Off/
1/2/
On/
1
3
/2/3
/4/5
Off
Description
Sets the operating mode selected by the B position of the WHITE BAL switch.
Memory: Auto white balance
ATW: Auto tracing white balance
Selects the transition time when the WHITE BAL switch setting is changed (1 is fastest).
Selects the ATW (auto tracing white) transition speed (1 is fastest).
Runs AWB (auto white balance) for the center of the screen.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Operation >White Setting
Makes settings related to white balance adjustment.
Item
Filter White Memory
Setting
On/ Off
Description
Sets the white balance memory area for each
FILTER knob position number when White
Balance is set to Preset or ATW.
ˎ When Electrical CC is assigned to an assignable switch, this sets independent white balance memory areas for Electrical CC A, B, C, and D settings.
ˎ When Electrical CC is not assigned to an assignable switch, this sets white balance memory areas for each FILTER knob position number.
Operation >Offset White
Makes settings related to white balance offset values.
Item
Offset White<A>
Warm Cool <A>
Warm Cool
Balance<A>
Offset White <B>
Warm Cool <B>
Warm Cool
Balance<B>
Setting
On/
Off
Approximate color temperature display
(Approx. 1600K to 3200K to
16000K)
–99 to
On/ Off
Approximate color temperature display
(Approx. 1600K to 3200K to
16000K)
–99 to
±0
±0
to +99
to +99
Description
Selects whether to add (On) or not to add (Off) an offset value to the white balance in memory A.
When Offset White<A> is set to On, this specifies the offset (as a color temperature) to add to the white balance in memory A. (Note that the error increases for higher offset color temperatures.
Adjust while viewing the actual image.)
Specifies a more precise color temperature, for use when a satisfactory image cannot be obtained with the Warm Cool <A> setting.
When this is set to On, the offset adjusted here is added to the white balance of channel B.
When Offset White<B> is set to On, this specifies the offset (as a color temperature) to add to the white balance in memory A. (Note that the error increases for higher offset color temperatures.
Adjust while viewing the actual image.)
Specifies a more precise color temperature, for use when a satisfactory image cannot be obtained with the Warm Cool <B> setting.
Operation >Shutter
Sets the shutter operating mode.
Item
Mode
Setting
Speed /Angle
Description
Selects the operating mode of the electronic shutter.
Speed: Sets the shutter speed as a time (units: seconds).
Angle: Sets the shutter speed as an angle (units: degrees).
Operation >Slow Shutter
Sets the slow shutter.
Item Setting
Setting
Number of Frames
On/
2
Off
/3/4/5/6/7/8/16
Description
Turns the slow shutter function on/off.
Sets the number of accumulated frames for the slow shutter function.
Operation >Time Zone
Sets the time zone.
Item
Time Zone
Setting
UTC +14:00 to UTC Greenwich to UTC –12:00 Kwajalein
Description
Selects the difference in time from UTC
(Greenwich Mean Time) in units of 30 minutes.
Operation >Clip
Makes settings relating to clip names and management.
[Note]
Do not assign clip names that begin with the “.” (period) symbol. Clips with names in which the first character is “.” cannot be viewed in the application software on a computer.
Item Setting Description
Clip Naming
Title Prefix
Number Set
Title/ Plan
Text input
Settings vary according to the
Clip Naming setting.
Selects the clip naming format.
Title: Name specified by Title Prefix.
Plan: Name specified in planning metadata (if no name is specified in planning metadata, the name specified by Title Prefix is used.)
Sets the title part (4 to 46 alphanumeric characters) of clip titles using a character string
Sets the numeric portion of the clip name.
When Clip Naming is set to Title:
0001 to 9999
When Clip Naming is set to Plan and a planning metadata file is loaded:
00001 to 99999
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Operation >Update Media
Updates the media’s management file.
Item
Media (A)
Media (B)
Setting
Execute/Cancel
Execute/Cancel
Description
Updates the management information of the SxS memory card in slot A (execute by selecting
Execute).
Updates the management information of the SxS memory card in slot B (execute by selecting
Execute).
Operation >GPS
Turns location information (GPS) on/off.
Item
GPS
Setting
On/ Off
Description
Turns the GPS function on/off.
Operation >Planning Metadata
Makes settings relating to planning metadata operations.
Item
Load Media (A)
Setting
Execute/Cancel
Load Media (B)
Properties
Clear Memory
Clip Name Disp
Execute/Cancel
Execute/Cancel
Execute/Cancel
Title1(ASCII) /Title2(UTF-8)
Description
Loads planning metadata from the SxS memory card in slot A.
Execute to display a list of planning metadata files stored on the SxS memory card in slot A. Select a file to display the properties screen.
Loads planning metadata from the SxS memory card in slot B.
Execute to display a list of planning metadata files stored on the SxS memory card in slot B. Select a file to display the properties screen.
Displays the planning metadata content loaded in the camcorder (execute by selecting Execute).
Clears the planning metadata loaded in the camcorder (execute by selecting Execute).
Selects the display format if the clip name is
specified in planning metadata (page 54).
Operation >Flash Band Reduce
Corrects the flashband phenomena.
Item
[Note]
This item is disabled (grayed out) during recording and when Slow&Quick is set to On.
Setting Description
Setting On/ Off Turns the flashband reduction function on/off.
[Notes]
ˎ Momentary noise may occur due to discontinuous video and audio when switching Flash Band Reduce
ˎ on/off.
ˎ The setting returns to the default value when power is switched off.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Paint Menu
Default values are shown in bold .
Paint >Switch Status
Turns various correction functions and the test signal on/off.
Item Setting Description
Gamma
Black Gamma
Matrix
Knee
White Clip
On
On/
On
On
On
/Off
Off
/Off
/Off
/Off
Turns the gamma function on/off.
Turns the black gamma function on/off.
Turns the matrix function on/off.
Turns the knee function on/off.
Turns the white clip function on/off.
Detail
Aperture
Flare
Test Saw
On
On
On
On/
/Off
/Off
/Off
Off
[Note]
If set to Off, it is reset to On when power is next turned on.
Turns the detail function on/off.
Turns the aperture function on/off.
Turns the flare correction function on/off.
Turns the test signal on/off.
Paint >White
Sets the color temperature, and adjusts white balance manually.
Item
Color Temp <A>
Color Temp Balance
<A>
R Gain<A>
B Gain<A>
Color Temp <B>
Color Temp Balance
<B>
R Gain <B>
B Gain <B>
Setting
1500K to
3200K
to 50000K
–99 to
–99 to
–99 to
1500K to
–99 to
–99 to
–99 to
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
to +99
to +99
to +99
3200K to 50000K
to +99
to +99
to +99
Description
Displays the white balance color temperature saved in memory A.
Sets the white balance gain value saved in memory A (linked to R gain and B gain).
Sets the white balance R gain value saved in memory A.
Sets the white balance B gain value saved in memory A.
Displays the white balance color temperature saved in memory B.
Sets the white balance gain values saved in memory B (linked R gain and B gain).
Sets the white balance R gain value saved in memory B.
Sets the white balance B gain value saved in memory B.
Paint >Black
Sets the black level (image level without lighting).
You can achieve a desired look by adjusting the black level for deeper or shallower blacks.
Item Setting Description
Master Black
R Black
B Black
–99 to
–99 to
–99 to
±0
±0
±0
to +99
to +99
to +99
Sets the master black level.
Sets the R black level.
Sets the B black level.
Paint >Flare
Makes settings related to flare correction.
Flare is a phenomenon where the video level increases across the entire image due to the effects of bright regions in the image, increasing the brightness of darker regions and reducing contrast. It is caused by reflected light inside the lens.
Item Setting Description
Setting On /Off Turns the flare correction function on/off.
Master Flare
R Flare
G Flare
B Flare
–99 to
–99 to
–99 to
–99 to
±0
±0
±0
±0
to +99
to +99
to +99
to +99
Sets the master flare correction level.
Sets the R flare correction level.
Sets the G flare correction level.
Sets the B flare correction level.
Paint >Gamma
Makes settings related to gamma correction.
Gamma correction allows you to adjust the contrast of the image to significantly alter the impression of an image.
Item Setting Description
Setting
Step Gamma
Turns the gamma correction function on/off.
Sets a gamma correction value in 0.05 steps.
Master Gamma
R Gamma
G Gamma
B Gamma
Gamma Category
On /Off
0.35 to 0.45
to 0.90
(0.05 steps)
–99 to ±0 to +99
–99 to
±0
to +99
–99 to ±0 to +99
–99 to
±0
to +99
STD /HG/User
Sets the master gamma level.
Sets the R gamma level.
Sets the G gamma level.
Sets the B gamma level.
Selects the gamma category.
STD: Standard gamma curve for video signals
HG: Gamma curve that imitates gradation and color reproduction of shooting with film
User: User-defined gamma curve created using
CvpFileEditorTM V4.2
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Paint >Gamma
Makes settings related to gamma correction.
Gamma correction allows you to adjust the contrast of the image to significantly alter the impression of an image.
Item Setting Description
Gamma Select Settings vary according to the
Gamma Category setting.
Selects the gamma table used for gamma correction.
When Gamma Category is STD
STD1 DVW: DVW camcorder equivalent
STD2 x4.5: ×4.5 gain
STD3 x3.5: ×3.5 gain
STD4 240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent
STD5 R709: ITU-R709 equivalent (default setting)
STD6 x5.0: ×5.0 gain
When Gamma Category is HG
HG1 3250G36: Compresses 325% video input to
100% video output.
HG2 4600G30: Compresses 460% video input to
100% video output.
HG3 3259G40: Compresses 325% video input to
109% video output.
HG4 4609G33: Compresses 460% video input to
109% video output (default setting).
When Gamma Category is User
User 1: Gamma table registered in User1 (default setting)
User 2: Gamma table registered in User2
User 3: Gamma table registered in User3
User 4: Gamma table registered in User4
User 5: Gamma table registered in User5
Paint >Black Gamma
Makes settings related to black gamma correction.
Black gamma correction allows you to reproduce gradations and colors in black or near-black (dark) parts of the picture.
Item Setting Description
Setting On/ Off Turns the black gamma correction function on/ off.
[Note]
To enable the black gamma function, set Saturation
Mode to Low Key.
Paint >Black Gamma
Makes settings related to black gamma correction.
Black gamma correction allows you to reproduce gradations and colors in black or near-black (dark) parts of the picture.
Item Setting Description
Range Low/L.Mid/ H.Mid
Master Black Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99
Selects the effective range of the black gamma correction.
Low: 0 to 3.6%
L.Mid: 0 to 7.2%
H.Mid: 0 to 14.4%
Sets the master black gamma level.
Paint >Knee
Makes settings related to knee correction.
Knee correction is processing that prevents blown out highlights by compressing the bright parts of the image in response to the upper limit for the dynamic range of the recorded/output image. The signal level where knee processing begins is called the “knee point,” and the slope of knee compression is called the
“knee slope.”
Item Setting Description
Setting
Point
On /Off
75% to 95% to 109%
Turns the knee correction function on/off.
Sets the knee point when the DCC function is off.
Slope
Knee Saturation
–99 to ±0 to +99
On /Off
Sets the knee slope when the DCC function is off.
Turns the knee saturation function on/off.
Knee Saturation Level –99 to ±0 to +99
[Note]
To enable the knee saturation function, set Saturation
Mode to Knee.
Sets the knee saturation level.
Paint >White Clip
Makes settings related to white clip adjustment.
White clip processing limits the maximum level of video output signals. The maximum video output signal value is called the “white clip level.”
Item Setting Description
Setting
Level
On /Off
90.0% to 109.0%
The default setting varies according to the system frequency setting.
Turns the white clip adjustment function on/off.
Sets the white clip level.
The default setting is 108.0% when the system frequency is 59.94, 29.97, 24, or 23.98. The setting is 105.0% when the system frequency is 50.25.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Paint >Detail(HD)/Detail(SD)
Makes settings related to detail adjustments in HD mode and SD mode.
Detail adjustment processing improves the clarity of images by adding a detail signal to the outline of the subject.
Item Setting Description
Setting
Level
H/V Ratio
On /Off
–99 to
–99 to
±0
±0
to +99
to +99
Turns the detail adjustment function on/off.
Sets the detail level.
Crispening
Level Depend
Level Depend Level
Frequency
Knee Aperture
Knee Aperture Level
Limit
White Limit
–99 to
On
On/
/Off
–99 to
–99 to
Off
–99 to
–99 to
–99 to
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
to +99
to +99
to +99
to +99
to +99
to +99
Sets the mix ratio between the H detail level and the V detail level.
Sets the crispening level.
Turns the level dependence adjustment function on/off.
Sets the level dependence level.
Sets the center frequency of the H detail signal
(larger values give finer detail).
Turns the knee aperture correction function on/ off.
Sets the knee aperture level.
Sets the detail limiter for both the white-side and black-side directions.
Sets the white-side detail limiter.
Black Limit
V Black Limit
V Detail Creation
–99 to
–99 to
NAM/ Y
±0
±0
to +99
to +99
/G/G+R
Cross Color Suppress
(SD mode)
–99 to
±0
to +99
Sets the black-side detail limiter.
Sets the black-side V detail limiter.
Selects the source signal used to generate the V detail signal.
NAM: V detail signal created from the R signal, V detail signal created from the G signal, or V detail signal created from the B signal, whichever signal has the highest level
Y: Y signal
G: G signal
G+R: Mixed signal comprising the G signal and R signal in a 1:1 ratio
Sets the cross color suppression level of the detail.
[Note]
This setting is disabled if the detail adjustment function is Off, and when Operation Format Frequency in the setup menu is set to 50 or 25.
Paint >Aperture
Makes settings related to aperture correction.
Aperture correction processing improves resolution by adding high-frequency aperture signals to the video signal, which corrects deterioration due to high-frequency characteristics.
Item Setting Description
Setting
Level
On /Off
–99 to ±0 to +99
Turns the aperture correction function on/off.
Sets the aperture level.
Paint >Skin Detail
Makes settings related to skin detail correction.
Skin detail correction processing increases or decreases the detail level of a specified color range, for the purpose of obtaining attractive reproduction of skin tones.
Item Setting Description
Setting
Area Detection
On/ Off
Execute/Cancel
Area Indication
Level
Saturation
Hue
Width
On/ Off
–99 to
–99 to
0
0 to 40
±0
±0
to 359
to +99
to +99
to 90
Turns the skin detail correction function on/off.
Displays a color detection screen for detecting colors for skin detail correction (execute by selecting Execute).
Turns the display of a zebra pattern in areas targeted for skin detail correction on/off.
Sets the skin detail level.
Sets the saturation of the color targeted for skin detail correction.
Sets the hue of the color targeted for skin detail correction.
Sets the range for the hue of the color targeted for skin detail correction.
Paint >Matrix
Makes settings related to matrix correction.
Adjusts the hue and vividness of the image using matrix correction.
You can select a matrix to achieve a specific purpose using “Adaptive Matrix” to control the effect of a linear matrix or “Preset Matrix” for a predefined parameter set. You can also set user-defined parameters as a “User Matrix.”
Item Setting Description
Setting Turns the matrix correction function on/off.
Adaptive Matrix
Preset Matrix
On /Off
On/
Off
On /Off
Turns the adaptive matrix function on/off.
Turns the preset matrix function on/off.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Paint >Matrix
Makes settings related to matrix correction.
Adjusts the hue and vividness of the image using matrix correction.
You can select a matrix to achieve a specific purpose using “Adaptive Matrix” to control the effect of a linear matrix or “Preset Matrix” for a predefined parameter set. You can also set user-defined parameters as a “User Matrix.”
Item Setting Description
Preset Select
User Matrix
Level
Phase
1: SMPTE240M
2: ITU-709
3: SMPTE Wide
4: NTSC
5: EBU
6: PAL
On/ Off
–99 to ±0 to +99
Selects a preset matrix.
1: SMPTE240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent
2: ITU-709: ITU-709 equivalent
3: SMPTE Wide: SMPTE WIDE equivalent
4: NTSC: NTSC equivalent
5: EBU: EBU equivalent
6: PAL: PAL equivalent
Turns the user matrix correction function on/off.
Sets the saturation of the color of the entire image.
Sets the color tone (phase) of the entire image.
User Matrix R-G
User Matrix R-B
User Matrix G-R
User Matrix G-B
User Matrix B-R
User Matrix B-G
–99 to ±0 to +99
–99 to
±0
to +99
–99 to ±0 to +99
–99 to
±0
to +99
–99 to ±0 to +99
–99 to
±0
to +99
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined R-G user matrix.
Sets a user-defined R-B user matrix.
Sets a user-defined G-R user matrix.
Sets a user-defined G-B user matrix.
Sets a user-defined B-R user matrix.
Sets a user-defined B-G user matrix.
Paint >Multi Matrix
Makes settings related to multi matrix correction.
Multi-matrix correction sets the saturation using a 16-axis hue space.
Item Setting Description
Setting
Area Indication
Color Detection
Reset
Axis
Hue
On/
On/
Execute/Cancel
Execute/Cancel
B
Off
Off
/B+/MG–/MG/MG+/R/R+/YL–/
YL/YL+/G–/G/G+/CY/CY+/B–
–99 to ±0 to +99
Turns the multi matrix correction function on/off.
Turns the display of a zebra pattern in the color area targeted for multi matrix correction on/off.
Displays a color detection screen for detecting colors for multi matrix correction (execute by selecting Execute).
Sets all hue and saturation on each axis to default values (execute by selecting Execute).
Sets the color targeted for multi matrix correction
(16-axis mode)
Sets the hue of the color targeted for multi matrix correction for each 16-axis mode.
Paint >Multi Matrix
Makes settings related to multi matrix correction.
Multi-matrix correction sets the saturation using a 16-axis hue space.
Item Setting Description
Saturation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the saturation of the color targeted for multi matrix correction for each 16-axis mode.
Paint >V Modulation
Makes settings related to V modulation shading correction.
V modulation shading corrects the vertical slope of the sensitivity arising from the relationship between the lens and prism.
Item Setting Description
Setting On /Off
Master V Modulation
R V Modulation
G V Modulation
B V Modulation
–99 to
–99 to
±0
±0
to +99
to +99
–99 to
±0
to +99
–99 to ±0 to +99
Turns the V modulation shading correction function on/off.
Sets the master V modulation level.
Sets the V modulation level of the R signal.
Sets the V modulation level of the G signal.
Sets the V modulation level of the B signal.
Paint >Low Key Saturation
Makes settings related to low key saturation correction.
Corrects the saturation of colors in dark parts of the image.
Item Setting Description
Setting On/ Off Turns the low key saturation correction function on/off.
Level
Range
–99 to ±0 to +99
Low/L.Mid/
H.Mid
[Note]
To enable the low key saturation function, set Saturation
Mode to Low Key.
Sets the saturation of colors in low luminance areas.
Selects the luminance level for which low key saturation is enabled.
Paint >Saturation Mode
Makes settings related to saturation correction.
Item
Saturation Mode
Setting
Knee /Low Key
Knee Saturation
Black Gamma
Low Key Saturation
On
On/
On/
/Off
Off
Off
Description
Selects whether the saturation function operates at high levels (Knee) or low levels (Low Key).
Turns the knee saturation function on/off.
Turns the black gamma correction function on/ off.
Turns the low knee saturation function on/off.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Paint >Noise Suppression
Makes settings related to noise suppression (noise compression).
This allows you to effectively suppress noise components while preserving fine edge components of the subject.
Item Setting Description
Setting
Level
On /Off
Low/ Mid /High
Turns the noise suppression function on/off.
Selects the noise suppression level.
Maintenance Menu
Default values are shown in bold .
Maintenance >White Shading
Makes settings related to white shading correction.
White shading is required for each different lens to correct luminance and color irregularities in bright areas arising from lens characteristics.
Item Setting Description
Channel Select
White H Saw
White H Para
White V Saw
White V Para
White Saw/Para
Red
–99 to
±0
to +99
–99 to
–99 to
–99 to
On
/Green/Blue
/Off
±0
±0
±0
to +99
to +99
to +99
Selects the target for white shading correction.
Sets the SAW white shading correction value for the horizontal direction.
Sets the parabola white shading correction value for the horizontal direction.
Sets the SAW white shading correction value for the vertical direction.
Sets the parabola white shading correction value for the vertical direction.
Turns the white shading SAW/parabola correction function on/off.
Maintenance >Black Shading
Makes settings related to black shading correction.
Item
Channel Select
Black H Saw
Setting
Red /Green/Blue
–99 to ±0 to +99
Black H Para
Black V Saw
Black V Para
Black Saw/Para
Master Black
Master Gain (TMP)
–99 to
–99 to
–99 to
On /Off
–99 to
±0
±0
±0
±0
to +99
to +99
to +99
to +99
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Description
Selects the target for black shading correction.
Sets the SAW black shading correction value for the horizontal direction.
Sets the parabola black shading correction value for the horizontal direction.
Sets the SAW black shading correction value for the vertical direction.
Sets the parabola black shading correction value for the vertical direction.
Turns the black shading SAW/parabola correction function on/off.
Sets the master black level.
Sets a temporary master gain value.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Maintenance >Battery
Makes settings related to batteries.
Item
Near End: Info Battery
End: Info Battery
Near End: Sony Battery
End: Sony Battery
Setting
5% /10%/15%...95%/100%
to 11.5V
Near End: Other Battery 11.5V to
End: Other Battery
DC Low Voltage2
0%/1%/2%/3%/4%/5%
11.5V
(0.1V steps)
11.0V
(0.1V steps)
11.8V
(0.1V steps)
11.0V
(0.1V steps)
11.0V
to 17V
to 14.0V
to 14.0V
(0.1V steps)
to 17.0V
Detected Battery Sony Info Battery/Sony Battery/
Other Battery/DC IN
Maintenance >DC Voltage Alarm
Sets alarms relating to external DC supply voltage.
Item
DC Low Voltage1
Setting
11.5V
to 17V
(0.1V steps)
Description
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
Near End” warning when using a BP-GL65/GL95 battery pack.
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
End” warning when using a BP-GL65/GL95 battery pack.
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
Near End” warning when using a BP-L60S/L80S battery pack.
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
End” warning when using a BP-L60S/L80S battery pack.
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
Near End” warning when using a non-Sony battery pack.
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
End” warning when using a non-Sony battery pack.
Displays the result of automatic battery pack type detection.
Description
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
Near End” warning when using an external power source connected to the DC IN connector.
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
End” warning when using an external power source connected to the DC IN connector.
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Item
Front MIC Select
Setting
Mono/ Stereo
Rear XLR Auto
Front MIC CH1 Ref
On/ Off
–70dB/–60dB/
–30dB
–50dB
/–40dB/
Description
Selects whether the front microphone is monaural (Mono) or stereo (Stereo).
Turns the automatic detection function on/off for detecting cable connections on the AUDIO IN
CH-1/CH-2 connectors on the rear panel.
Selects the reference level of the front microphone for channel 1.
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Item
Front MIC CH2 Ref
Rear MIC CH1 Ref
Rear MIC CH2 Ref
Line Input Ref
Min Alarm Volume
Speaker Attenuate
Headphone Out
Reference Level
Reference Out
CH1&2 AGC Mode
CH3&4 AGC Mode
AGC Spec
Limiter Mode
Output Limiter
CH1 Wind Filter
Setting
–70dB/–60dB/
–30dB
–70dB/
–30dB
–70dB/
–30dB
+4dB
Off
Off
–60dB
–60dB
–50dB /–40dB/
/–50dB/–40dB/
/–50dB/–40dB/
/0dB/–3dB/EBUL
/Set
/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB
Selects the reference level of the front microphone for channel 2.
Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO
IN CH1 switch is set to MIC.
Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO
IN CH2 switch is set to MIC.
Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO
IN CH1 and AUDIO IN CH2 switches are set to
LINE.
Selects the volume when the ALARM knob is turned all the way down.
Off: Inaudible
Set: Audible
Selects the volume from the monitor speakers
(does not affect earphone volume).
Mono
/Stereo
–20dB /–18dB/–16dB/–12dB/
EBUL
+4dB/
Mono
0dB /–3dB/EBUL
/Stereo
Selects whether the earphones are monaural
(Mono) or stereo (Stereo).
Sets the output level of the 1 kHz test signal.
Sets the output level relative to the reference input level.
Automatically adjusts the input level of analog audio signals recorded on channels 1 and 2, and selects whether to make the adjustments separately for each channel (Mono) or in stereo mode (Stereo).
Mono /Stereo Automatically adjusts the input level of analog audio signals recorded on channels 3 and 4, and selects whether to make the adjustments separately for each channel (Mono) or in stereo mode (Stereo).
–6dB /–9dB/–12dB/–15dB/–17dB Selects the AGC characteristic (saturation level).
Off
/–6dB/–9dB/–12dB/–15dB/
–17dB
On/
On/
Off
Off
Description
Selects the limiter characteristic (saturation level) for large input signals when adjusting the audio input level manually. Select Off if not using the limiter.
Turns the audio output limiter on/off.
Turns the channel 1 wind noise reduction filter on/off.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Item
CH2 Wind Filter
Setting
On/ Off
CH2 Wind Filter
CH4 Wind Filter
1kHz Tone on Color
Bars
MIC CH1 Level
MIC CH2 Level
Rear1/WRR Level
Rear2/WRR Level
On/
On/
On/
Off
Off
Off
Side1/
/Auto
Front /Front+Side1
Side2/
Front
/Front+Side2
Side1
Side2
/Front/Front+Side1
/Front/Front+Side2
Description
Turns the channel 2 wind noise reduction filter on/off.
Turns the channel 3 wind noise reduction filter on/off.
Turns the channel 4 wind noise reduction filter on/off.
Sets whether to output (On) or not output (Off) a
1 kHz test signal in color bar mode.
Auto: Outputs a test signal only when the AUDIO
SELECT CH1 switch is set to AUTO.
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level when recording input audio from the front microphone on channel 1.
Side1: LEVEL knob (left) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side1: LEVEL knob (left) and MIC LEVEL knob (linked control)
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level when recording input audio from the front microphone on channel 2.
Side2: LEVEL knob (right) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side2: LEVEL knob (right) and MIC LEVEL knob (linked control)
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level of a wireless microphone or a device connected to the
AUDIO IN CH-1 connector on the rear panel.
Side1: LEVEL knob (left) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side1: LEVEL knob (left) and MIC LEVEL knob (linked control)
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level of a wireless microphone or a device connected to the
AUDIO IN CH-2 connector on the rear panel.
Side2: LEVEL knob (right) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side2: LEVEL knob (right) and MIC LEVEL knob (linked control)
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Item
Audio CH3 Level
Audio CH4 Level
Setting
Side3
Side4
Maintenance >WRR Setting
Makes settings related to the wireless tuner.
Item
WRR Valid CH Sel
WRR CH Select
WRR Delay Comp
TX
TX Audio Peak
TX Input Level
TX ATT Level
Setting
All /CH1
TX1
/TX2
On
---
---
---
---
/Front/Front+Side3
/Front/Front+Side4
/Off
/Peak
/Mic/Line
Description
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level recorded on channel 3.
Side3: LEVEL knob on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side3: LEVEL knob and MIC LEVEL knob
(linked control)
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level recorded on channel 4.
Side4: LEVEL knob on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side4: LEVEL knob and MIC LEVEL knob
(linked control)
Description
Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of the wireless tuner (All) or channel 1 only (CH1).
Selects the reception channel for display in the menu.
TX1: Displays channel 1.
TX2: Displays channel 2.
Selects whether to enable (On) or disable (Off) the delay compensation function for wireless input audio. (When On is selected, all E-E output audio is delayed by about 8 ms.)
Displays the name of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH Select.
Displays whether the AF level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH Select are over peak.
Displays whether the input level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH Select is set to microphone
(Mic) or line (Line).
Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by
WRR CH Select. (The setting range varies depending on the transmitter.)
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Maintenance >WRR Setting
Makes settings related to the wireless tuner.
Item
TX LCF Frequency
TX System Delay
TX RF Power
TX Power Save
Setting
---
Auto /0.0ms to 8.0ms
High (Power value) mW/Mid
(Power value) mW/Low (Power value) mW
Active/Sleep
Description
Sets the low cut filter frequency of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH Select. (The setting range varies depending on the transmitter.)
Sets the amount of audio delay.
Auto: Automatically corrects for the amount of delay so that the delay in the audio from the wireless tuner is zero.
0.0ms to 8.0ms: Sets the amount of estimated wireless system delay, for cases in which several wireless systems are being used via a device such as an audio mixer.
Sets the RF power level of the transmitter communicating on the channel selected by WRR
CH Select. (The setting range varies depending on the transmitter.)
Sets the power saving mode of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH Select.
Active: Set the transmitter to startup mode.
Sleep: Set the transmitter to power saving mode.
Maintenance >Time Code
Makes settings related to timecode.
Item
TC Out
Setting
Auto /Generator
DF/NDF
LTC UBIT
DF
Fix
/NDF
/Time
Description
Selects the timecode output.
Auto: Outputs the timecode generator value during recording, and the timecode reader value during playback.
Generator: Outputs the timecode generator value during recording and playback.
Selects drop-frame mode (DF) or non-drop-frame mode (NDF).
Sets the data recorded in LTC user bits.
Fix: Records user-specified data.
Time: Records the current time.
Maintenance >Time Code
Makes settings related to timecode.
Item
Counter Display
Setting
Counter /Duration
Description
Select the method used to reset the counter value displayed on the viewfinder screen.
Counter: Continue to increment until the RESET button is pressed.
Duration: Reset each time that recording is started.
Maintenance >Essence Mark
Makes settings related to essence marks.
Item
Find Mode
Setting
Clip /Rec Start
Description
Sets the operation when the NEXT/PREV button is pressed.
Rec Start: Moves to the next or the previous recording start mark, respectively.
Clip: Moves to the start of the next clip when the
NEXT button is pressed. Moves to the start of the current clip when the PREV button is pressed (or moves to the start of the previous clip if the PREV button is pressed at the start of the clip).
Maintenance >Camera Config
Makes settings related to various camcorder operations.
Item
HD SDI Remote I/F
Setting
Off /Characters/
Green Tally/Red Tally
Color Bars Select
User Menu Only
ARIB
On/
/100%/75%/SMPTE
Off
Description
Sets whether to enable the recording control function for an external device connected to the
SDI OUT 1/2 connector (HD SDI output) of the camcorder. If enabled, it selects the indicator used to display the recording state of the external device.
Off: Recording control function is disabled.
Chara: Displayed using the external device control indicator on the status display in the viewfinder.
G-Tally: Displayed using the TALLY indicator
(green tally) in the viewfinder.
R-Tally: Displayed using the REC indicator
(recording red tally) in the viewfinder.
Selects the color bar type.
Selects whether to display the User menu only
(On) or display the menu list (Off) when the camcorder is displaying the menu.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Maintenance >Camera Config
Makes settings related to various camcorder operations.
Item Setting
User Menu with Lock On/ Off
Description
Selects whether to lock the menu display, showing the User menu only.
On: Enter an arbitrary passcode number to lock the menu display. (Only the User menu is displayed.)
Off: Enter the passcode number entered when
“On” was selected to unlock the menu display. (When unlocked, the normal menu list is displayed.)
RM Common Memory On/
RM Rec Start
SET Key on Thumbnail
RM
Off
/Camera/PARA
Pause
/Play
[Note]
In normal menu display operation, this item is not displayed.
For details about menu display operation, see
Selects whether to share (On) or not share (Off) settings between when using a remote control unit connection and when the camcorder is operated locally.
Selects which of the recording start/stop buttons are enabled when a remote control unit is connected,
RM: Remote control unit
Camera: Camcorder
PARA: Both
Selects the operation when the MENU knob is pressed with only one thumbnail selected.
Maintenance >Camera Config
Makes settings related to various camcorder operations.
Item
ALAC
Setting
Auto /Off
Description
Sets whether to execute ALAC (Auto Lens
Aberration Correction) automatically.
Auto: Execute ALAC automatically when an
ALAC-compatible lens is attached and ALAC is enabled.
Off: Do not execute.
[Note]
Depending on the aberration correction lens, the aberration correction function may not be activated immediately (“ALAC” does not appear on the viewfinder screen) after turning the power on, even when this setting is set to Auto. If this occurs, turn the lens zoom ring and focus ring to the end stop and back, and check whether the “ALAC” indicator appears on the viewfinder screen.
Contact a Sony service representative for information about aberration correction lenses.
Maintenance >Preset White
Makes settings related to white balance preset values.
Item
Color Temp <P>
C.Temp BAL <P>
Setting
1500K to
–99 to ±0
3200K to 50000K
to +99
R Gain <P>
B Gain <P>
AWB Enable <P>
Color Temp <P>
C.Temp BAL <P>
R Gain <P>
BGain <P>
AWB Enable <P>
–99 to
–99 to
On/
Off
1500K to
–99 to
–99 to
–99 to
On/Off
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
to +99
to +99
3200K to 50000K
to +99
to +99
to +99
Description
Sets the white balance preset value.
Sets the fine color temperature settings, for use when a satisfactory image cannot be obtained using Color Temp<P>.
Sets the R gain preset value.
Sets the B gain preset value.
Turns execution of the AWB (auto white balance) function on/off when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.
Sets the white balance preset value.
Sets the fine color temperature settings, for use when a satisfactory image cannot be obtained using Color Temp<P>.
Sets the R gain preset value.
Sets the B gain preset value.
Turns execution of the AWB (auto white balance) function on/off when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Maintenance >White Filter
Makes settings related to filters.
Item
ND Filter C.Temp
ND FLT C.Temp<1>
ND FLT C.Temp<2-4>
Electrical CC<A>
Electrical CC<B>
Electrical CC<C>
Electrical CC<D>
Setting
On/ Off
3200K
3200K
3200K
3200K/
---
/4300K/5600K/6300K
/4300K/5600K/6300K
/4300K/5600K/6300K
4300K
3200K/4300K/
---
/5600K/6300K
5600K
3200K/4300K/5600K/
/6300K/
6300K
/
Description
Turns the function that assigns electrical CC filters to ND filters on/off.
Selects the color temperature when electrical CC filters are assigned to ND filters (filter 1).
Selects the color temperature when electrical CC filters are assigned to ND filters (filters 2 to 4).
Selects the color temperature when the electrical
CC filter switching function is assigned to an assignable switch.
Selects the color temperature when the electrical
CC filter switching function is assigned to an assignable switch.
Selects the color temperature when the electrical
CC filter switching function is assigned to an assignable switch. Select “----” if not using C.
Selects the color temperature when the electrical
CC filter switching function is assigned to an assignable switch. Select “----” if not using D.
Maintenance >DCC Adjust
Makes settings related to DCC (dynamic contrast control).
Item
DCC Function Select
Setting Description
DCC D Range
DCC Point
DCC /Fix Selects the setting method for the knee point when the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to CAM with
DCC on.
DCC: Automatically adjusts the knee point to match the luminance of the subject.
Fix: Sets the knee point to a fixed value.
400%/450%/500%/550%/
600%
Sets the dynamic range when the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to CAM with DCC on.
–99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the DCC minimum knee point.
DCC Gain
DCC Delay Time
DCC Peak Filter
–99 to ±0 to +99
–99 to ±0 to +99
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the gain relative to the DCC detected value.
Sets the DCC control speed (speed of response to changes in the video).
Adjusts the response sensitivity relative to the peaks in DCC detected values.
Maintenance >Flicker Reduce
Makes settings related to the flicker correction function.
You can correct the flicker created when shooting a subject under lighting where the brightness varies periodically, such as fluorescent lighting, due to the relationship between the frequency and the recording frame rate.
Item Setting Description
Mode Auto /On/Off
Frequency 60Hz/50Hz
Sets the operation of the flicker correction function.
On: Always operating.
Auto: Operates when flicker is detected.
Off: Does not operate.
The factory setting is 60Hz when System
Frequency is set to 59.94, 29.97, or 23.98.
The factory setting is 50Hz when System
Frequency is set to 50 or 25.
Maintenance >Genlock
Makes settings related to genlock.
Item
Genlock
Reference
Setting
On
/Off
Internal/External(HD)/
External(SD)/SDI IN/CA
Description
Turns the genlock function on/off.
Displays the type of reference signal used by the camcorder.
Maintenance >Auto Shading
Executes auto black shading correction.
Item
Auto Black Shading
Reset Black Shading
Master Gain (TMP)
Setting
Execute/Cancel
Execute/Cancel
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Description
Executes auto black shading correction (execute by selecting Execute).
Clears the black shading correction value (execute by selecting Execute).
Sets a temporary master gain value. (The value is the same as the value selected with the GAIN switch.)
Maintenance >APR
Makes settings related to automatic pixel noise reduction.
Item
APR
Reset
Setting
Execute/Cancel
Execute/Cancel
Description
Executes the automatic pixel noise reduction function to suppress white flecks in SLS mode
(execute by selecting Execute).
Deletes white flecks data that were added by execution of the APR and automatic black balance adjustment functions (execute by selecting
Execute).
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Maintenance >Basic Authentication
Makes settings related to basic authentication.
Item
User Name
Password
Setting Description
(Displays the current user name.) Sets the user name (arbitrary name for basic authentication). Set to “admin” by factory default.
******* Sets the password (for basic authentication). Set to “pxw-x400” by factory default.
Maintenance >Network
Makes settings related to network connections.
Item Setting
Setting
Wireless Network
NFC
On/ Off
Wi-Fi Access Point/Wi-Fi Station/
Modem/ Off
Execute/ Cancel
WPS
Channel
SSID & Password
Execute/Cancel
Auto(5GHz)/
Auto
/CH1/CH2/
CH3/CH4/CH5/CH6/CH7/CH8/
CH9/CH10/CH11
(SSID display)
(Password display)
Description
Turns the network function on/off.
Sets the operating mode for wireless LAN connections.
Initiates a one-touch connection using NFC
(execute by selecting Execute).
Starts Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) (execute by selecting Execute).
Sets the wireless LAN channel.
[Note]
“Auto(5GHz)” may not be displayed, depending on the wireless LAN module used.
Displays the SSID and password.
Device Name (Wireless)
IP Address (Wireless)
Subnet Mask (Wireless)
MAC Address (Wireless)
Regenerate Password
Wired LAN
Wired LAN Remote
Execute/Cancel
Enable/
On/ Off
Disable
Displays the name of network device attached to the USB wireless LAN module connector
Displays the IP address when connected to a wireless LAN.
Displays the subnet mask when connected to a wireless LAN.
Displays the MAC address of the USB Wireless LAN
Module attached to the camcorder.
Regenerates a password (execute by selecting
Execute).
Enables/disables wired LAN connection.
If connected to a network using a LAN cable, operation from a Wi-Fi remote control, web menu, and “Content Browser Mobile” is enabled.
Maintenance >Network
Makes settings related to network connections.
Item
Wired LAN Detail
Settings
Setting
DHCP ( On /Off)
Description
Enables/disables DHCP.
When set to On, an IP address is automatically assigned to the camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP address manually, set to Off.
Enter the IP address of the camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
IP Address (DHCP/On: obtain automatically , DHCP/Off:
192.168.2.50
)
Subnet Mask (DHCP/On: obtain automatically , DHCP/Off:
255.255.255.0
)
Gateway (DHCP/On: obtain automatically , DHCP/Off: 0.0.0.0
)
DNS Auto ( On /Off)
Primary DNS Server (DNS Auto/
On: obtain automatically
Auto/Off: 0.0.0.0
)
, DNS
Secondary DNS Server (DNS
Auto/On: obtain automatically ,
DNS Auto/Off: 0.0.0.0
)
Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
Enter the gateway for the access point.
Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
Enables/disables automatic DNS.
When set to On, the address of the DNS server is obtained automatically.
Enter the primary DNS server for the router.
Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off.
Enter the secondary DNS server for the router.
Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off.
Maintenance >Network Client Mode
Makes settings related to network client mode.
[Note]
Network client mode cannot be set if values are not entered for all items.
Item Setting Description
Setting
Detail Settings
On/ Off
CCM Address
CCM Port (1 to 65535 ( 8443 ))
Turns network client mode on/off.
Sets the address of the CCM to connect.
Host name or IP address
Sets the port number of the CCM to connect
User Name
Password
Sets the user name for authentication of the CCM to connect.
Sets the password of the CCM to connect.
NCM with Proxy (Enable/ Disable ) Enable: Enable proxy recording when connected with a CCM.
Disable: Disable proxy recording when connected with a CCM.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Maintenance >File Transfer
Makes settings related to network transfer of data on SxS memory cards in the camcorder.
Item
File Transfer
Auto Upload (Proxy)
Setting
Execute/Cancel
Off /On
Description
Switches to transfer mode (execute by selecting
Execute).
Turns proxy file auto transfer on/off.
Maintenance >Streaming
Makes settings related to streaming.
Item
Setting
Setting
On/ Off
Preset Select
Size
Bit Rate
Type
Preset 1
RTP
/Preset 2/Preset 3
HD Auto/1280×720/
480×270
9Mbps/6Mbps/
MPEG-2 TS/UDP
640×360
3Mbps
/
2Mbps/1Mbps/0.5Mbps
/MPEG-2 TS/
/
Description
Turns streaming transmission on/off.
[Notes]
ˎ This setting is set to Off when you turn the power on again.
ˎ When set to On, the monitoring function is not available.
Selects a streaming preset.
The settings are common to Preset 1/Preset 2/
Preset 3. See below for descriptions for the settings in a preset.
Sets the size of video for streaming.
When “HD Auto” is selected, the size is set to
1920×1080 or 1280×720, according to the setting of the recording format recorded on the SxS memory card or the format of the clip to be played back.
Sets the bit rate of video for streaming.
The selectable bit rate varies depending on the
Size setting.
[Notes]
ˎ Audio/video data is transmitted as-is via the Internet.
Accordingly, the data may potentially be exposed to other parties. Always check that the transmission
ˎ destination can receive the streaming data.
ˎ The data may be sent to an unintended party if the address or other settings are configured incorrectly.
ˎ Not all frames may be played, depending on the status of the network.
ˎ The picture quality may deteriorate in scenes with excessive motion.
ˎ Not all frames may be played when the stream is set to a large size with a small bit rate. To reduce this, select a smaller size for the Size setting.
Selects the type of video for streaming.
Maintenance >Streaming
Makes settings related to streaming.
Item
Destination Address
Destination Port
Audio Channel
Setting
Character string (
1 to 65545 (
CH1/CH2
1234 )
0.0.0.0
/CH3/CH4
)
Description
Enter the address of the transmission destination server for streaming data.
Enter the port number of the transmission destination server used for streaming.
Selects the audio channel for the streaming output.
Maintenance >Clock Set
Sets the internal clock.
Item
Date Mode
12H/24H
Setting Description
YYMMDD
/MMDDYY/DDMMYY Selects the display format for dates.
12H/ 24H Selects the clock display format.
Date
Time
Displays the date setting screen.
Displays the time setting screen.
Maintenance >Language
Selects the display language for messages.
Item
Select
Setting
English /
Espanol/ Русский
/
Description
Selects the display language for messages.
Maintenance >Hours Meter
Makes settings related to the digital hours meter.
Item
Hours (System)
Hours (Reset)
Reset
Setting xxxxH
(xxxx hours) xxxxH
(xxxx hours)
Execute/Cancel
Description
Displays the cumulative hours of use (cannot be reset).
Displays the cumulative hours of use (can be reset).
Resets the Hours (Reset) display to 0 (execute by selecting Execute).
Maintenance >Network Reset
Returns network-related settings to their factory default state.
Item
Reset
Setting
Execute/Cancel
Description
Resets network settings (execute by selecting
Execute).
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Maintenance >Fan Control
Sets the fan control mode.
Item
Setting
Setting
Auto /Minimum/Off in Rec
Description
Selects the fan control mode.
Maintenance >VF Display Setting
Makes settings related to the viewfinder display.
Item
Chara/Marker
Brightness
Setting
5
/4/3/2/1
Description
Sets the brightness of character strings, icons, and markers superimposed in the viewfinder image.
Maintenance >Version
Displays the version of the camcorder, and updates the camcorder.
Item
Number
Setting
Version Up
Execute/Cancel
Description
Displays the software version of the camcorder
(Vx.xx).
Updates the camcorder (execute by selecting
Execute).
Net-Func Version
Number
Net-Func Ver.Up
Execute/Cancel
[Note]
Cannot be selected when the version updater SD card is not inserted.
Displays the firmware version of the wireless LAN connection function of the camcorder (Vx.xx)
Updates the firmware of the wireless LAN connection function (execute by selecting
Execute).
File Menu
Default values are shown in bold .
File >User File
Makes settings relating to user file operations.
Item
Load SD Card
Setting
Save SD Card
File ID
Recall User Preset Execute/Cancel
Store User Preset
Clear User Preset
Execute/Cancel
Execute/Cancel
Load Customize Data On/
Off
Load White Data On/ Off
File >All File
Makes settings related to ALL file operations.
Item
Load SD Card
Setting
Save SD Card
File ID
All Preset
Store All Preset
Execute/Cancel
Execute/Cancel
Description
Displays a screen for loading user file settings from an SD card.
Displays a screen for saving user file settings onto an SD card.
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID of user files.
Returns the value of menu items registered in the
User menu to the preset values (execute by selecting [Execute]).
Stores the value of menu items registered in the
User menu items as the preset values (execute by selecting [Execute]).
Returns the current settings and preset values of menu items registered in the User menu to the factory default values (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Sets whether to load User menu customized information when [Load SD Card] is executed.
Sets whether to load white balance information when [Load SD Card] is executed.
Description
Displays a screen for loading All File settings from an SD card.
Displays a screen for saving All File settings onto an SD card.
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID of All Files.
Returns all items to their preset values (execute by selecting Execute).
Stores the current settings of all items as the preset values (execute by selecting [Execute]).
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
File >All File
Item
Makes settings related to ALL file operations.
Clear All Preset
3Sec Clear Preset On/ Off
File >Scene File
Makes settings related to scene file operations.
Item
Recall Internal Memory
Setting
Store Internal Memory
Load SD Card
Save SD Card
File ID
Scene White Data On/ Off
File >Reference File
Makes settings related to reference file operations.
Item
Store Reference
Setting
Execute/Cancel
Clear Reference
Load Reference(SD
Card)
Save Reference(SD
Card)
Setting
Execute/Cancel
Execute/Cancel
Execute/Cancel
Execute/Cancel
Description
Returns the current settings and presets of All File menu items to their factory default values
(execute by selecting Execute).
Turns the function that clears the currents settings and presets of each item on/off, when the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch is pushed up and held for three seconds in the CANCEL/PRST position.
Description
Displays a screen for recalling scene files from internal memory.
Displays a screen for storing scene files in internal memory.
Displays a screen for loading scene files from an
SD card.
Displays a screen for saving scene files onto an SD card.
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID of scene files.
Sets whether to reflect the while balance data of scene files when recalling scene files.
File >Reference File
Makes settings related to reference file operations.
Item
File ID
Setting
File >Lens File
Makes settings related to lens file operations.
Item
Display Mode
Setting
Model Name /Lens ID
Recall Internal Memory
Store Internal Memory
Load SD Card
Save SD Card
File ID
File Source
Clear Lens Offset
Lens Auto Recall
Execute/Cancel
Off /On(Lens Name)/
On(Serial Number)
Lens Serial Number
Lens Name
Lens Manufacturer
Description
Stores the current settings of reference file target menu items as the preset values (execute by selecting [Execute]).
Returns the current settings and preset values of reference file target menu items to the factory default values (execute by selecting [Execute]).
Loads reference file settings from and SD card and sets the preset values (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Stores the preset values of reference file target menu items to an SD card (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Master V Modulation –99 to
±0
to +99
Lens Center H –40 to ±0 to +40
Lens Center V
R Flare
G Flare
B Flare
–40 to ±0 to +40
–99 to ±0 to +99
–99 to
±0
to +99
–99 to ±0 to +99
Description
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID of reference files.
Description
Selects the items to display in the list box that appears when saving or loading a file.
Displays a screen for recalling lens files from internal memory.
Displays a screen for storing lens files in internal memory.
Displays a screen for loading lens files from an SD card.
Displays a screen for saving lens files onto an SD card.
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID of lens files.
Displays the number of the selected file.
Clears the lens file (execute by selecting Execute).
Sets whether to automatically recall a lens file when a lens that supports serial communication is attached.
Displays the serial number of the attached lens
(lenses that support serial communication only).
Displays the model name of the attached lens
(lenses that support serial communication only).
Displays the name of the manufacturer of the attached lens (lenses that support serial communication only).
Sets the SAW shading correction value in the vertical direction in the lens file.
Sets the horizontal position of the center marker in the lens file.
Sets the vertical position of the center marker in the lens file.
Sets the R flare level in the lens file.
Sets the G flare level in the lens file.
Sets the B flare level in the lens file.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
File >Lens File
Makes settings related to lens file operations.
Item
White Offset R
Setting
–99 to ±0 to +99
White Offset B –99 to ±0 to +99
Shading Ch Select
Shading H SAW
Shading H PARA
Shading V SAW
Shading V PARA
Red /Green/Blue
–99 to
–99 to
–99 to
–99 to
±0
±0
±0
±0
to +99
to +99
to +99
to +99
File >User Gamma
Makes settings related to user gamma.
Item
Current Settings
Setting
Load SD Card
Reset 1/2/3/4/5/All
Description
Sets the white balance offset R channel correction value for the lens in the lens file.
Sets the white balance offset B channel correction value for the lens in the lens file.
Selects the target for white shading correction.
Sets the SAW white shading correction value in the horizontal direction in the lens file.
Sets the parabola white shading correction value in the horizontal direction in the lens file.
Sets the SAW white shading correction value in the vertical direction in the lens file.
Sets the parabola white shading correction value in the vertical direction in the lens file.
Description
Displays a list screen of the current user gamma file settings (file names).
Displays a screen for loading User Gamma settings from an SD card.
Resets the settings in the selected user gamma file (execute by selecting Execute).
Select All to reset all user gamma files.
000
7. Menu Display and Settings
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
Using the Assignable Switch item of the Operation menu, you can assign user-specified functions to the
ASSIGN. 0 to 3 switches, the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 switches, the ONLINE button, and the RET button on the lens.
The following tables lists the functions that are assigned when the camcorder is shipped from the factory.
Switch or button
ASSIGN. 0 switch
ASSIGN. 1 switch
ASSIGN. 2 switch
ASSIGN. 3 switch
ASSIGNABLE 4 switch
ASSIGNABLE 5 switch
RET button
ONLINE button
Function
No assignment
No assignment
No assignment
No assignment
No assignment
No assignment
Rec Review (if playback is allowed)
Auto transfer proxy clip
Assignable Switch setting
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Lens RET
Network Client Mode
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 0 Switch
Assignable Switch setting Function
Off
Marker
ATW Hold
State when camcorder is next powered on
—
Setting retained
—
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 Switch
[Note]
Immediately after you assign a function to the ASSIGN. 2 switch or you switch the recording format, the setting of the switch at that point may not match the camcorder’s internal state. After assigning a function, switch the ASSIGN. 2 switch or power the camcorder off and on again.
Assignable Switch setting Function
Off No assignment
Front Mic
Marker
Switches between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected.
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
Picture Cache Rec
1)
Zebra
Clip Continuous Rec
Rec Source
Turns picture cache recording mode on/off.
Turns zebra display on/off.
Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off.
Switches the signals to be recorded between the camera picture and external input. (If the camcorder is currently recording or playing, the switch takes effect after recording or playback ends.)
Digital Extender ×2
Digital Extender ×3
Turns the screen magnification (×2) function on/off.
Turns the screen magnification (×3) function on/off.
Digital Extender ×4 Turns the screen magnification (×4) function on/off.
1) When Picture Cache Rec is assigned, Operation >Rec Function is disabled (grayed out) and cannot be set.
Picture Cache Rec
Focus Magnifier
Zebra
Shot Mark1
Shot Mark2
Clip Flag OK
Clip Flag NG
Clip Flag Keep
Flash Band Reduce
No assignment
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
Holds the white balance setting in the ATW
(auto-tracking white balance) mode
Turns picture cache recording mode on/off.
Turns the focus magnification function on/off.
Turns zebra display on/off.
Writes Shot Mark1.
Writes Shot Mark2.
Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip being recorded or played.
Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip being recorded or played.
Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip being recorded or played.
Turns the flashband correction function on/off.
Setting retained
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
—
—
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 and 3 Switches, the
ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 Switches, and the ONLINE Button
Assignable Switch setting Function
Off
Front Mic
Marker
ATW
ATW Hold
Turbo Gain
No assignment
Switches between stereo (On) and monaural (Off) when a stereo microphone is connected.
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
State when camcorder is next powered on
—
Setting retained
Turns ATW (auto tracing white balance) mode on/ off.
Setting retained
Setting not retained
Hold the white balance setting in the ATW mode. —
Executes Turbo Gain according to the setting of
Operation >Gain Switch >Gain Turbo.
Setting not retained
Rec Review
Rec
NFC
Network Client Mode
Executes recording review.
Starts or stops recording.
Executes the NFC function.
Turns network client mode on/off.
—
—
—
Setting retained
Streaming
Auto Upload(Proxy)
Picture Cache Rec
Spotlight
Setting not retained
Setting retained
Setting retained
Setting retained
Backlight
VF Mode
Video Signal Monitor
Lens Info
Zoom Tele/Wide
Zoom Wide/Tele
Turns streaming transmission on/off.
Turns proxy file auto transfer on/off.
Turns picture cache recording mode on/off.
Turns the spotlight function in auto iris mode on/ off.
Turns the backlight function in auto iris mode on/ off.
Switches the viewfinder screen between B&W
(On) and color (Off).
Switches the video signal monitor display function.
Switches the depth of field indication between off, displayed in meters, and displayed in feet.
When a lens that supports serial communication is installed, assigns the Zoom Tele function to
ASSIGNABLE 4, and assigns the Zoom Wide function to ASSIGNABLE 5 (displayed only when
<4> and <5> are set).
When a lens that supports serial communication is installed, assigns the Zoom Wide function to
ASSIGNABLE 4, and assigns the Zoom Tele function to ASSIGNABLE 5 (displayed only when
<4> and <5> are set).
Setting retained
Setting retained
Setting retained
Setting retained
—
—
Assignable Switch setting Function
Manual Focus Assist
Focus Magnifier
Zebra
Lens RET
Return Video
Return Video2
Return Video3
Return Video4
Shot Mark1
Shot Mark2
Clip Flag OK
Clip Flag NG
Clip Flag Keep
Color Temp SW 3200K
Color Temp SW 4300K
Color Temp SW 5600K
Color Temp SW 6300K
Electrical CC
Turns the manual focus assist function on/off.
Turns the focus magnification function on/off.
Turns zebra display on/off.
Displays return video signal.
When a camera extension unit is not connected:
Rec Review (if playback is allowed)
Displays the return 1 video signal.
Displays the return 2 video signal.
Displays the return 3 video signal.
Displays the return 4 video signal.
Writes Shot Mark1.
Writes Shot Mark2.
Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip being recorded or played.
Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip being recorded or played.
State when camcorder is next powered on
Setting retained
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip being recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Adjusts white balance using 3200K preset value.
Setting retained
Adjusts white balance using 4300K preset value.
Setting retained
Adjusts white balance using 5600K preset value.
Setting retained
Adjusts white balance using 6300K preset value.
Setting retained
Function that switches the electrical CC filter
(3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) applied to white balance adjustment values.
Sequence with each press of the switch/button:
3200K 4300K 5600K 6300K
Can be changed using menu settings (Electrical
CC <A> <B> <C> <D>).
Setting retained
CC5600K
Clip Continuous Rec
Slot Select
Digital Extender ×2
[Note]
This function is not available when Maintenance >White
Filter >ND Filter C.Temp in the setup menu is set to On.
If you set ND Filter C.Temp to On after assigning the function, the assignable switch ceases to function.
Applies a 5600K electrical CC filter to white balance adjustment values.
Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off.
When recording media is loaded in both card slots A and B, selects the card you want to use.
Turns the screen magnification (×2) function on/ off.
Setting retained
Setting not retained
—
Setting not retained
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
Assignable Switch setting Function
Digital Extender ×3
Digital Extender ×4
Digital Extender
×2×3×4
Flash Band Reduce
Proxy Rec Start/Stop
Turns the screen magnification (×3) function on/ off.
Turns the screen magnification (×4) function on/ off.
Switches the magnification of the screen magnification function.
Each press of the switch or button switches in the order Off ˎ×2 ˎ×3 ˎ×4 ˎOff.
Turns the flashband correction function on/off.
Starts/stops proxy recording.
State when camcorder is next powered on
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the RET Button on the Lens
Assignable Switch setting
Off
Lens RET
Return Video
Rec Review
Shot Mark1
Shot Mark2
Clip Flag OK
Clip Flag NG
Clip Flag Keep
Focus Magnifier
Digital Extender ×2
Digital Extender ×3
Digital Extender ×4
Digital Extender
×2×3×4
Proxy Rec Start/Stop
Function
No assignment
Displays return video signal.
When a camera extension unit is not connected:
Rec Review (if playback is allowed)
Displays return video signal.
Executes recording review.
Writes Shot Mark1.
Writes Shot Mark2.
Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip being recorded or played.
Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip being recorded or played.
Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip being recorded or played.
Turns the focus magnification function on/off.
Turns the screen magnification (×2) function on/ off.
Turns the screen magnification (×3) function on/ off.
Turns the screen magnification (×4) function on/ off.
Switches the magnification of the screen magnification function.
Each press of the switch or button switches in the order Off ˎ×2 ˎ×3 ˎ×4 ˎOff.
Starts/stops proxy recording.
State when camcorder is next powered on
—
—
—
—
—
—
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
000
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
User Configuration Data
You can save setup menu settings in the camcorder’s internal memory and on SD cards.
This allows you to quickly recall an appropriate set of menu settings for the current situation.
To save setup data on an SD card, insert a writable
SD card (page 31) into the UTILITY SD card slot
before proceeding.
Inserting an SD card (for saving configuration data)
1
Open the switch cover.
2
Insert the SD card (for saving configuration data) in the UTILITY SD card slot.
3
Close the switch cover.
Ejecting an SD card (for saving configuration data)
1
Open the switch cover.
2
Press the SD card in slightly, then remove the card.
[Notes]
ˎ If the camcorder is turned off or the SD card is removed while the SD is being accessed, the integrity of data on the card cannot be guaranteed. All data recorded on the card may be discarded. Always make sure the ACCESS indicator is off before turning off the camcorder or removing the SD card.
ˎ Take caution to prevent the SD card from flying out when inserting/ejecting the card.
The following user data is supported.
User Files
User files save the setting items and data of the customizable User menu. You can save up to 64 files on an SD card. By loading this file into the camcorder memory, you can customize the setup of the User menu.
ALL Files
ALL files save the configuration data of all menus.
You can save up to 64 files on an SD card.
[Note]
Device specific data (shading, output levels, and other data that requires adjustment for the specific device) is not saved.
Scene Files
Scene files save adjustments to Paint menu items for the purpose of shooting a particular scene. You can save up to five files in the camcorder’s internal memory and up to 64 files on an SD card.
Scene files allow you to save the following types of data.
ˎ
ˎ Shutter speeds set in standard mode or ECS mode
ˎ White balance data
The data that is saved and loaded depends on the setting of File >Scene File >Scene White
Data in the setup menu.
Scene files can be stored in internal memory on the camcorder or on an SD card.
Scene files can also be loaded into the camcorder.
Reference Files
Reference files save the scene file standard settings
(when File ID is Standard). You can save one file in the camcorder’s internal memory and one file on an SD card.
Lens Files
You can set the following data for correcting for the lens characteristics, and save the data as a lens file. You can save up to 32 lens files in the camcorder’s internal memory and up to 64 lens files on an SD card.
Configuration data
V modulation shading correction values
Center marker position
Sub-items
M V Modulation
Flare level
White balance correction value
White shading correction value
Lens Center H
Lens Center V
R Flare
G Flare
B Flare
White Offset R
White Offset B
Shading Ch Select
Shading H SAW
Shading H PARA
Shading V SAW
Shading V PARA
Gamma Files
You can save up to five user-defined gamma table data files (User Gamma Data File) in internal memory.
000
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
User Files
Saving a User File
1
Select File > User File >Save SD Card in the setup menu.
A screen for selecting a user file save destination appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No
File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID name will overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you can modify it.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob.
Loading a User File
1
Select File >User File >Load SD Card in the setup menu.
A user file list screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load, then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
[Note]
The camcorder will reboot automatically after loading configuration data.
Changing the File ID
1
Select File >User File >File ID in the setup menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2
Select characters and enter the File ID.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
000
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
ALL Files
Saving Configuration Data as an ALL
File
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
Restoring All Current Settings to
Preset Values
1
Select File >All File >Save SD Card in the setup menu.
A screen for selecting an ALL file save destination appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No
File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID name will overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you can modify it.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob.
If an error message appears
One of the following error messages may appear during execution of the save, or as soon as you select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not saved.
Problem Solution Error message
File Access
NG
No recordable media is inserted.
Insert recordable media.
Changing the File ID
1
Select File >All File >File ID in the setup menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2
Select characters and enter the File ID.
Loading Configuration Data
1
Select File >All File >Load SD Card in the setup menu.
An ALL file list screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load, then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
[Notes]
ˎ When you load a file from an SD card, the data saved in the camcorder’s internal memory is overwritten.
ˎ When loading files from one device to another, if the firmware versions on the two devices do not match, the setting values for functions that are not supported on the destination device are not loaded.
ˎ The camcorder will reboot automatically after loading configuration data.
If an error message appears
One of the following error messages may appear during execution of the load, or as soon as you select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not loaded.
Problem Solution Error message
File Access
NG
There is no readable media
The specified file does not exist on the media
Insert the media that contains the file you want.
In this document, initial setup menu settings configured/saved by the user are referred to as
“preset values.”
Even after loading files to set up the camcorder, and overwriting original files with new settings, you can reset the contents of the files by recovering the preset values.
1
Select File >All File >All Preset in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
Saving All Current Settings as Preset
Values
1
Select File >All File >Store All Preset in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
[Note]
The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing.
Resetting Current Settings and Preset
Values to Factory Default Settings
1
Select File >All File >Clear All Preset in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
[Note]
The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing.
000
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Scene Files
Saving a Scene File in Internal
Memory
Changing the File ID
1
Select File >Scene File >Store Internal Memory in the setup menu.
A scene file list screen appears.
If the File ID is set to “Standard” destination, preconfigured standard settings are saved.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, then press the knob.
The scene file is saved, overwriting any existing file, in the selected destination.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob.
1
Select File >Scene File >File ID in the setup menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2
Select characters and enter the File ID.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
Loading a Scene File from Internal
Memory
Saving a Scene File on an SD Card
1
Select File >Scene File >Save SD Card in the setup menu.
A scene file save destination screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No
File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID name will overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you can modify it.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob.
1
Select File >Scene File >Recall Internal Memory in the setup menu.
A scene file list screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
3 then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
Load a Scene File from an SD Card
1
Select File >Scene File >Load SD Card in the setup menu.
A scene file list screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load, then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
000
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Reference Files
Saving Current Settings as Preset
Values
1
Select File >Reference File >Store Reference in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
Loading a Reference File from an SD
Card
1
Select File >Reference File >Load Reference(SD
Card) in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
Saving Current Settings as Preset
Values on an SD Card
1
Select File >Reference File >Save Reference(SD
Card) in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
Resetting Current Settings and Preset
Values to Factory Default Settings
1
Select File >Reference File >Clear Reference in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
Changing the File ID
1
Select File >Reference File >File ID in the setup menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2
Select characters and enter the File ID.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
000
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Lens Files
Saving a Lens File in Internal Memory
1
Select File >Lens File >Store Internal Memory in the setup menu.
A lens file list screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with File ID of “No offset.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID name will overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you can modify it.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob.
Changing the File ID
1
Select File >Lens File >File ID in the setup menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2
Select characters and enter the File ID.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
Loading a Lens File from Internal
Memory
Saving a Lens File on an SD Card
1
Select File >Lens File >Save SD Card in the setup menu.
A lens file save destination screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No
File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID name will overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you can modify it.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob.
1
Select File >Lens File >Recall Internal Memory in the setup menu.
3
A lens file list screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load, then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
Loading a Lens File from an SD Card
1
Select File >Lens File >Load SD Card in the setup menu.
A lens file list screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load, then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
Loading a Lens File Automatically
When you are using a lens that supports serial communication, you can set up the camcorder by automatically loading the lens file that corresponds to the lens settings (Lens Auto Recall function).
To use the Lens Auto Recall function, set File >Lens
File Lens >Auto Recall in the setup menu to one of the following.
Off: Do not use the Lens Auto Recall function.
On (Lens Name): Load the lens file that corresponds to the lens model name.
On (Serial Number): Load the lens file that corresponds to the lens model name and serial number (when the lens supports communication of the serial number).
If the lens does not support communication of the serial number, even when set to On (Serial
Number), load the lens file that corresponds to the lens model name.
000
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Gamma Files
Checking the Current Gamma File
Settings (File Names)
Select File >User Gamma >Current Settings in the setup menu to display a list of the currently configured user gamma files.
Using User Gamma Files Created
Using CvpFileEditorTM V4.3
Save created user gamma files to be loaded in the
“PRIVATE/SONY/PRO/CAMERA/HD_CAM” directory of the SD card.
Loading a User Gamma File from an
SD Card
Resetting a User Gamma File to Initial
State
1
Select File >User Gamma >Load SD Card in the setup menu.
A user gamma file list screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load, then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
1
Select File >User Gamma >Reset in the setup menu.
A gamma file number reset screen appears.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select the number of the gamma file to reset (1 to 5).
To reset all gamma files, select [All].
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob.
000
9. Connecting External Devices
Connecting a Remote Control Unit
When an RM-B170 Remote Control Unit,
RCP1001/1501 Remote Control Panel, or other control unit is connected, some camcorder functions can be controlled from that unit.
You can use the display on the RM-B170 or a video monitor connected to the MONITOR connector of the remote control unit to perform camcorder menu operations and monitor the camcorder picture.
Releasing Remote Control Mode
Turn off the camcorder and disconnect the remote control unit.
The switch settings on the camcorder become enabled.
Connecting a Monitor to an RM-B170
Connecting a Remote Control Unit
The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the RM-
B170 outputs the same signal as the output from the VIDEO OUT connector.
To connect a monitor to the MONITOR connector on the RM-B170, use the black cable supplied with the RM-B170.
Using the remote control cable, connect between the REMOTE connector (8-pin) of the camcorder and the camera connector of the remote control unit.
When you turn on the camcorder after making the connection, the camcorder enters remote control mode, enabling menu operations and shooting operations.
[Notes]
ˎ Remote control operation is not supported if USB connection to the camcorder is enabled.
ˎ If a USB connection to the camcorder is enabled during remote control, remote control mode is released.
ˎ Do not connect or disconnect the remote control unit when the camcorder is on.
ˎ A remote control cable is not supplied with the RCP-
1001/1501 Remote Control Unit.
The following switches of the camcorder are disabled when a remote control unit is connected.
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ ˎ SHUTTER switch
ˎ
ˎ ASSIGN. 1/3 switches, ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches, and the ONLINE button to which the Turbo Gain or ATW function has been assigned
Image Quality Adjustment when an
RM-B170 is Connected
When the RM-B170 is connected, the parameters for camera image quality adjustment items (paint data) are set to the parameters that were specified the last time that the RM-B170 was connected.
Function of Recording Start/Stop
Buttons when an RM-B170 is
Connected
Set the function of the buttons using Maintenance
>Camera Config >RM Rec Start in the setup menu.
The functions of the buttons for the RM Rec Start settings are given below.
Button RM Rec Start setting
RM Camera PARA
Camcorder REC
START button
Disabled Enabled Enabled
Lens VTR button Disabled Enabled Enabled
ASSIGN. 1/3 switches,
ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches, and
ONLINE button assigned with recording start/ stop function
RM-B170 VTR button
Disabled Enabled Enabled
Enabled Disabled Enabled
Data Structure of Image Quality
Adjustment Data
The non-volatile memory of the camcorder used for storing camera image quality adjustment data
(paint data) consists of the two regions shown below: a “main data block” that is used when a remote control unit is not connected, and a
“remote control data block” that is used when a remote control unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is automatically selected and output to the camera section depending on whether or not a remote control unit, such as the RM-B170, is connected.
Camcorder setup menu
Main data block
RM-B170
Remote control data block
Camcorder non-volatile memory
Camera unit hardware
RM-B170 connected
RM-B170 not connected
When a remote control unit is connected, the
“remote control data block” is selected as the current paint data block, and the paint adjustment parameters that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was used are loaded.
However, when the settings of absolute value controls
1)
and absolute value switches
2)
are set on the remote control unit, the settings on the remote control unit override the settings on the camcorder.
When the remote control unit is disconnected from the camcorder, the “main data block” is reenabled, and the camcorder returns to the settings that were in effect before the remote control unit was connected.
1) Absolute value controls: Data corresponding to the angular position of the control is output. Controls for which data corresponding to the amount of rotation is output are called relative value controls.
2) Absolute value switches: Switches (or knobs), such as toggle switches or slide switches (except most momentary switches) whose positions must coincide with their functions are called absolute value switches.
When Maintenance >Camera Config >RM
Common Memory in the setup menu is set to
[On], you can use settings of the paint adjustment
000
9. Connecting External Devices: Connecting a Remote Control Unit data stored in the main data block even if a remote control unit is connected. In this case, the settings stored in the main data block will be updated when you change the settings on the remote control unit. Thus, the settings of the paint data made with the remote control unit will be retained even after the remote control unit is removed. However, if the switch position on the remote control unit differs from the one on the camcorder, the switch position on the camcorder takes precedence.
Also, it is possible to keep the settings that are in effect before you connect the remote control unit.
In this case, you must set the control knobs to relative value mode on the remote control unit.
For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with the remote control unit.
Operating the Menu from the
RM-B170
1
Set the DISPLAY switch to the MENU position.
The menu is displayed on the monitor connected to the MONITOR connector of the
RM-B170.
2
Select and set menu items using the MENU
SELECT knob and CANCEL/ENTER switch.
3
When finished, set the DISPLAY switch to the
ON or OFF position to exit the menu.
For details about RMB170 operation, refer to the operation manual of the RM-B170.
000
9. Connecting External Devices
Connecting an External Monitor
Select the output signal and use an appropriate cable for the monitor to be connected.
of that external device to match the analog composite signal setting for the VIDEO OUT connector.
To input camcorder output audio to an external device such as a monitor, VTR, or other recording device, connect the audio output of the AUDIO
OUT connector to the audio input of that external device.
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).
BNC cable (not supplied)
HDMI OUT Connector (Type A
Connector)
BNC cable (not supplied)
Regardless of whether the signal is HD or SD, the same status information and menus can be displayed on the external monitor as those on the viewfinder screen.
[Note]
The SD signal down-converted output is enabled when
Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup menu is set to 720×486i or 720×576i.
>SDI Out1 Output/SDI Out2 Output in the setup
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).
VIDEO OUT Connector
SDI OUT Connector (BNC)
The SDI OUT connector can be used to connect a device that supports SDI. The device type can be a monitor, switcher, VTR, or other recording device.
The output signal from this connector can be turned on and off using Operation >Input/Output
The VIDEO OUT connector can be used to connect a device that supports analog composite signals.
The device type can be a monitor, VTR, or other recording device.
The output signal changes in conjunction with the setting of Operation >Input/Output >Output
Format in the setup menu.
To input the VIDEO OUT connector output signal to an external analog composite device, it may be necessary to change the input signal setting
You can turn the output signal from the camcorder on/off using Operation >Input/Output
>HDMI Output in the setup menu.
The output signal format is set using Operation
>Input/Output >Output Format in the setup menu.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable for connection.
000
9. Connecting External Devices
Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer
The clips recorded on SxS memory cards with this camcorder can be controlled on a computer or edited using optional nonlinear editing software.
USB Connection with a Computer
When you connect the camcorder to a computer using a USB cable (not supplied), the memory card in the slot is recognized as an extended drive by the computer.
When two memory cards are mounted in the camcorder, they are recognized as two independent extended drives by the computer.
USB cable
(not supplied)
[Notes]
ˎ Turn the camcorder on and wait until the image and information are displayed on the screen, then connect the
USB cable to the camcorder.
ˎ When connecting the USB cable to the computer, be careful to check the form and direction of the USB connector.
ˎ The camcorder does not work on the bus power from the computer.
To start USB connection
When you connect a computer to the PC connector with a USB cable (not supplied), the message “Connect USB Now?” is displayed to prompt you to confirm that you wish to enable the
USB connection.
If you select “Cancel” or push the MENU CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE position, or if you disconnect the USB cable, the message
“Connect USB Now?” disappears.
If you select “Execute” and press the MENU knob, the USB connection is enabled and the camcorder is recognized as an extension drive.
If the USB connection is enabled during recording/ playback operation, the operation is stopped and the message “USB Connecting” appears on the viewfinder screen.
At this time, the output signal from the VIDEO OUT connector and SDI OUT 1/2 connectors changes to a black signal.
[Notes]
ˎ The camcorder cannot be operated for recording, playback, and so on while the message “USB Connecting”
ˎ is displayed.
ˎ When the computer accesses the media loaded in the camcorder, do not try to carry out the following operations.
– Operating the camcorder (turning the power on/off, switching the operating mode, etc.)
– Removing or loading a media from an active slot
(being accessed from the computer)
– Removing or connecting the USB cable
Releasing the USB connection
To release the USB connection, follow the same procedure as that for removing a device from the computer.
To enable the USB connection again, first disconnect the USB cable and then reconnect it.
The message “Connect USB Now?” appears again.
To remove an SxS memory card
On Windows
1
Click on the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon on the task bar of the computer.
2
Select “Safely remove SxS Memory Card -
Drive(X:)” from the displayed menu.
3
Check that the “Safe To Remove Hardware” message appears, then remove the card.
On Macintosh
Drag the SxS memory card icon on the desktop to the Trash.
If the SxS memory card icon is displayed in the
Finder, click on the eject icon.
To use the application software
To copy clips to the local disk of your computer, the dedicated application software must be downloaded and installed on your computer. For
details about downloading software, see “Software
Although the data regarding recorded materials are stored over multiple files and folders, you can easily handle the clips without considering such data and directory structure by using the dedicated application software.
[Note]
If you perform operations on clips, such as copying the clips on the SxS memory card using Explorer (Windows) or Finder
(Macintosh), the subsidiary data contained by the clips may not be maintained.
To use a nonlinear editing system
In a nonlinear editing system, editing software
(option) that supports the formats recorded by the camcorder is required.
Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of your computer in advance, using the supplied application software.
Some editing software may not operate properly.
Be sure to confirm before use that it conforms to the recording formats used with this camcorder.
000
9. Connecting External Devices
Configuring a Shooting and Recording System
You can mount a CA-FB70/TX70 HD Camera Adaptor to the camcorder and connect a Camera Control
Unit (CCU).
This allows you to configure a shooting and recording system consisting of multiple camcorders with camera extension units connected to a remote control unit.
For more information about the CA-FB70 and CA-TX70, refer to their respective operation manuals.
[Notes]
ˎ When using the camcorder in this system, do not connect a video light to the camcorder.
ˎ Supported only for XAVC and MPEG HD recording.
ˎ
Tally and Call Indicators
The tally and call indicators for a system are as follows.
Data received from system HDVF LED indicators Text display on viewfinder screen
Tally Green
Tally
CA call Non-CA call
CALL
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
REC/
TALLY
LED
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
GREEN
TALLY
LED
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit
Lit
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit
Lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
No display No display No display
No display CALL
No display No display CALL
No display
No display
CALL
No display
CALL
No display
CALL
CALL
No display No display
No display No display CALL
No display CALL
No display No display CALL
No display
No display
No display
CALL
CALL
CALL
[Note]
Alarm indications using the tally indicator in the warning display are not displayed while a CA-FB70/TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected.
000
9. Connecting External Devices: Configuring a Shooting and Recording System
Supported Formats and Limitations of Shooting/Recording Systems
The supported formats and operation limitations of a shooting/recording system comprising the camcorder, camera adaptor, and camera control unit are shown in the following table.
Operation menu
Format
Frequency Rec Format
59.94
Input/Output
Output Format
SDI
1920×1080i
System format of camera adaptor / camera control unit
1920×1080 59.94i
Camcorder limitation
Return video display
No
29.97
23.98
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
XAVC-L 35 1080i
XAVC-L 25 1080i
HD422 50 1080i
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
XAVC-I 1280×720P
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1280×720P
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P
HQ 1920×1080P
HD422 50 720P
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P
HQ 1920×1080P
HD422 50 720P
1920×1080i
1280×720P
1920×1080PsF
1280×720P
1920×1080i
(2-3PD)
1280×720P
(2-3PD)
1920×1080 59.94i
1280×720 59.94P
1920×1080 29.97PsF
a)
1920×1080 59.94i
1280×720 59.94P
1920×1080 59.94i
1280×720 59.94P
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Operation menu
Format
Frequency Rec Format
Input/Output
Output Format
SDI
1920×1080i
System format of camera adaptor / camera control unit
Camcorder limitation
Return video display
50
25
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
XAVC-L 35 1080i
XAVC-L 25 1080i
HD422 50 1080i
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
XAVC-I 1280×720P
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1280×720P
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P
HQ 1920×1080P
HD422 50 720P
1920×1080i
1280×720P
1920×1080PsF
1280×720P
1920×1080 50i
1920×1080 50i
1280×720 50P
1920×1080 25PsF
1920×1080 50i
1280×720 50P
a)
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No a) A PsF setting is recommended when a CA-TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected.
[Note]
In a shooting/recording system, special recording functions, such as wireless LAN connection function or Slow & Quick Motion, cannot be used simultaneously.
000
9. Connecting External Devices
Recording External Input Signals
You can record SDI signals from devices connected to the SDI IN connector of the camcorder.
To output and record input signals instead of the camera picture, set Operation >Input/Output >Source
Select in the setup menu to [External].
[Notes]
ˎ External input signals cannot be recorded in Slow & Quick Motion mode. When a special recording mode, such as Slow &
Quick Motion mode, is selected, the recording mode is canceled when you set Operation >Input/Output >Source Select in
ˎ the setup menu to [External].
ˎ Execution of automatic adjustment functions, such as automatic black balance, and operations, such as playback, Rec
Review, and thumbnail display, will end when Operation >Input/Output >Source Select in the setup menu is set to
[External]. The camcorder enters stop mode and then the camera picture switches to external input.
ˎ Recording may stop if the input signal is disturbed while recording external input. Recording automatically resumes when the input signal returns to normal.
Supported External Input Signal Formats and Camcorder Recording Formats
HD/SD Operation >Format >Rec
Format in the setup menu
Operation >Format
>Frequency in the setup menu
Supported external input signal formats
HD XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
XAVC-I 1280×720P
59.94
50
59.94
50
59.94
50
HD 1920×1080 59.94P Level-A
HD 1920×1080 59.94P Level-B
HD 1920×1080 50P Level-A
HD 1920×1080 50P Level-B
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
HD/SD Operation >Format >Rec
Format in the setup menu
Operation >Format
>Frequency in the setup menu
Supported external input signal formats
HD
SD
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P
HD422 50 1080i
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920x1080i
HQ 1440x1080i
HQ 1280x720P
MPEG IMX 50
DVCAM
59.94
50
59.94
50
59.94
50
59.94
50
59.94
50
59.94
50
59.94
50
59.94
50
59.94
50
59.94
50
HD 1920×1080 59.94P Level-A
HD 1920×1080 59.94P Level-B
HD 1920×1080 50P Level-A
HD 1920×1080 50P Level-B
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
SD 486 59.94i
SD 576 50i
SD 486 59.94i
SD 576 50i
000
10. Maintenance and Inspection
Maintenance
Cleaning the Viewfinder
Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and mirror inside the viewfinder barrel.
Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially available lens cleaner.
[Note]
Never use organic solvents such as thinners.
Note about the Battery Terminals Exchanging the Battery of the
Internal Clock
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable part.
Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if the pins of the battery terminal are bent or deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep the unit working properly and to prolong its usable lifetime.
Contact a Sony service or sales representative for more information about inspections.
The camcorder’s internal clock is powered by a lithium battery. If the message “BackUp Battery
End” appears in the viewfinder, this battery must be exchanged. Contact a Sony service representative.
000
10. Maintenance and Inspection
Error/Warning System
If a warning, caution, or operating condition that requires confirmation occurs on the camcorder, a message is displayed in the viewfinder, the corresponding indicators start flashing, and a warning sound is emitted.
You can adjust the volume of the warning sound using the ALARM knob. If the ALARM knob is set to minimum, the warning sound will not be audible.
Error Display
The camcorder will stop operation when the following kind of display occurs.
Error message
E + error code
Warning sound WARNING indicator
Continuous —
Tally/REC indicator Cause and Solution
High-speed flashing Indicates an abnormality in the camcorder.
Turn off the camcorder, and check for any problem with connected devices, cables, or media.
(If the camcorder does not turn off when the POWER switch is set to OFF, remove the battery or disconnect the AC supply.)
If the error persists when the camcorder is turned on again, contact your Sony service representative.
Warning Display
Follow the instructions provided if the following display occurs.
Warning message Warning sound WARNING indicator
Media Near Full Intermittent Flashing
Media Full
Battery Near End
Continuous
Intermittent
On
Flashing
Battery End Continuous On
Temperature High
Voltage Low
Insufficient Voltage
Intermittent
Intermittent
Continuous
Flashing
Flashing
On
Tally/REC indicator Cause and Solution
Flashing The remaining capacity on the SxS memory card is getting low.
Replace at the earliest convenience.
High-speed flashing Clips could not be recorded, copied, or split because there is no remaining capacity on the SxS memory card.
Replace immediately.
Flashing The remaining capacity of the battery pack is getting low.
Recharge at the earliest convenience.
(The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.)
High-speed flashing The battery pack is dead.
Recording is disabled.
Connect a power source to DC IN and allow the battery pack to recharge without attempting to operate the camcorder.
(The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.)
Flashing
Flashing
The internal temperature is high.
Turn off the camcorder and allow it to cool down before operating it again.
The DC IN voltage is low (level 1).
Check the power source.
High-speed flashing The DC IN voltage is too low (level 2).
Recording is disabled.
Connect a different power source.
(The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.)
000
10. Maintenance and Inspection: Error/Warning System
Warning message
Clips Full
Last Clip Recording
Clips Near Full
Media(Proxy) Full
Clips(Proxy) Full
Media(Proxy) Near Full
Last Clip(Proxy) Rec
Clips(Proxy) Near Full
Media(A) 1) Full
Media(A)
1)
Clips Full
Media(A)
1)
Near Full
Media(A)
1)
Last Clip Rec
1) “(B)” is displayed for cards in slot B.
Warning sound WARNING indicator
Continuous On
Intermittent
Intermittent
Continuous
Continuous
Flashing
Flashing
On
On
Intermittent
Intermittent
Intermittent
Continuous
Continuous
Intermittent
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
Flashing
On
On
Flashing
Flashing
Tally/REC indicator Cause and Solution
High-speed flashing The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on an SxS memory card has been reached. Recording or copying more clips is not possible. Replace immediately.
Flashing The clip currently recording is the last clip that can be recorded, as the maximum number of clips has been reached.
Prepare a new SxS memory card.
Flashing The number of additional clips that can be recorded on the SxS memory card is getting low.
Replace at the earliest convenience.
High-speed flashing Proxy data cannot be recorded because there is no remaining free space on the proxy data SD card. Replace immediately.
High-speed flashing The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on the proxy data SD card has been reached. Recording more clips is not possible. Replace immediately.
Flashing The remaining free space on the proxy data SD card is getting low.
Replace at the earliest convenience.
Flashing The proxy data currently recording is the last clip that can be recorded, as the maximum number of clips has been reached.
Prepare a new proxy data SD card.
Flashing The number of additional clips that can be recorded on the proxy data SD card is getting low. Replace at the earliest convenience.
High-speed flashing When using the simultaneous recording function
High-speed flashing When using the simultaneous recording function
Flashing
Flashing
When using the simultaneous recording function
When using the simultaneous recording function
000
10. Maintenance and Inspection: Error/Warning System
Caution and Operation Confirmation Display
The following caution and operation messages may appear in the center of the screen. Follow the instructions provided to resolve the issue.
Display indication
Battery Error
Please Change Battery
Cause and Solution
An error was detected in the battery pack.
Replace with a normal battery pack.
Backup Battery End
Please Change
Unknown Media(A)
1)
Please Change
Media Error
Media(A)
1)
Needs to be Restored
Media Error
Cannot Record to Media(A)
1)
Media Error
Cannot Use Media(A)
1)
Cannot Use Media(A)
1)
Unsupported File System
Media(A)
1)
Error
Playback Halted
Media(A)
1)
Error
Different Media is Inserted
Cannot Use Media(A)
1)
The remaining capacity of the backup battery is insufficient.
Replace the backup battery.
A memory card that has been partitioned or a memory card containing more clips that can be handled by the camcorder was inserted.
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be replaced.
An error occurred on the memory card, and the card must be restored.
Eject and then re-insert the card, then repair the card.
The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be used for recording.
Playback may be possible, so making a copy and replacing the memory card is recommended.
The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be used for recording or playback.
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be replaced.
A card using a different file system or an unformatted card was inserted.
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be replaced or formatted using the camcorder.
Cannot continue playback because an error occurred while reading from the memory card.
If the problem persists, make a copy and replace the memory card.
Recording is stopped because an error occurred on the memory card.
If the problem persists, replace the memory card.
Different media was inserted. Eject the inserted card, and insert a card of the same type as the previously inserted card.
1) “(B)” is displayed for cards in slot B.
000
11. Appendix
Usage Precautions
The fan and battery are consumable parts that will need periodic replacement.
When operating at room temperature, a normal replacement cycle will be about 5 years.
However, this replacement cycle represents only a general guideline and does not imply that the life expectancy of these parts is guaranteed. For details on parts replacement, contact your dealer.
The life expectancy of the AC adaptor and the electrolytic capacitor is about 5 years under normal operating temperatures and normal usage
(8 hours per day; 25 days per month). If usage exceeds the above normal usage frequency, the life expectancy may be reduced correspondingly.
Use and storage
Do not subject the camcorder to severe shocks
ˎ The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body warped.
ˎ If an accessory mounted on the accessory shoe is subjected to severe shock, the accessory shoe may be damaged. In such a case, stop using it and contact your dealer or a Sony service representative.
Do not cover the camcorder while operating
Putting a cloth, for example, over the camcorder can cause excessive internal heat build-up.
After use
Always turn off the POWER switch.
Before storing the camcorder for a long period
Remove the battery pack.
Shipping
ˎ Remove the media before transporting the camcorder.
ˎ If sending the camcorder by truck, ship, air, or other transportation service, pack it in the shipping carton of the camcorder.
Care of the camcorder
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the lenses or optical filters using a blower.
Do not attempt to clean the interior of the camera using a blower. Any dust particles in the air that enter components may cause a malfunction.
If the body of the camcorder is dirty, clean it with a soft, dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth moistened in a little neutral detergent, then wipe dry. Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinners, as these may cause discoloration or other damage to the finish of the camcorder.
In the event of operating problems
If you should experience problems with the camcorder, contact a Sony service representative.
Use and storage locations
Store in a level, ventilated place.
Avoid using or storing the camcorder in the following places.
ˎ range: –5 °C to +40 °C (23 °F to 104 °F))
Remember that in summer in warm climates the temperature inside a car with the windows closed can easily exceed 50 °C (122 °F).
ˎ In damp or dusty locations
ˎ exposed to rain
ˎ Locations subject to violent vibration
ˎ
ˎ Close to radio or TV transmitters producing strong electromagnetic fields.
ˎ In direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods
To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable communications devices
The use of portable telephones and other communications devices near this camcorder can result in malfunction and interference with audio and video signals.
It is recommended that the portable communications devices near this camcorder be powered off.
Condensation
If the unit is suddenly taken from a cold to a warm location, or if ambient temperature suddenly rises, moisture may form on the outer surface of the unit and/or inside of the unit. This is known as condensation. If condensation occurs, turn off the unit and wait until the condensation clears before operating the unit. Operating the unit while condensation is present may damage the unit.
Fitting the zoom lens
It is important to fit the lens correctly, as otherwise damage may result. Be sure to refer to the section
“Mounting and Adjusting the Lens” (page 25).
Viewfinder
Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece lens pointing directly at the sun.
The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s rays and melt the interior of the viewfinder.
About the LCD panels
The LCD panel fitted to this unit is manufactured with high precision technology, giving a functioning pixel ratio of at least 99.99%. Thus a very small proportion of pixels may be “stuck”, either always off (black), always on (red, green, or blue), or flashing. In addition, over a long period of use, because of the physical characteristics of the liquid crystal display, such “stuck” pixels may appear spontaneously. These problems are not a malfunction. Note that any such problems have no effect on recorded data.
Phenomena specific to CMOS image sensors
The following phenomena that may appear in images are specific to CMOS (Complementary
Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensors. They do not indicate malfunctions.
White flecks
Although the CMOS image sensors are produced with high-precision technologies, fine white flecks may be generated on the screen in rare cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc. This is related to the principle of CMOS image sensors and is not a malfunction.
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the following cases:
ˎ when operating at a high environmental temperature
ˎ when you have raised the master gain
(sensitivity)
ˎ when operating in Slow-Shutter mode
The problem may be alleviated by executing automatic black balance adjustment.
Aliasing
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they may appear jagged or flicker.
Flicker
If recording is made under lighting produced by discharge tubes, such as fluorescent, sodium, or mercury-vapor lamps, the screen may flicker, colors may vary, or horizontal stripes may appear distorted.
In such cases, set the flicker-reduction function to
If the frame rate selected for recording is close to the power-supply frequency, flicker may not be reduced sufficiently even if you activate the
Flicker-Reduction function. In such cases, use the electronic shutter.
000
11. Appendix: Usage Precautions
Focal plane
Owing to the characteristics of the pickup elements (CMOS image sensors) for reading video signals, subjects that quickly move across the screen may appear slightly skewed.
Flashband
The luminance at the top and bottom of the screen may change when shooting a flashlight beam or a light source that quickly flashes. You can use the supplied application software to correct clips that contain frames with flash bands.
Fragmentation
If pictures cannot be recorded/reproduced properly, try formatting the recording media.
While repeating picture recording/playback with a certain recording media for an extended period, files in the media may be fragmented, disabling proper recording/storage. In such a case, make a backup of clips in the media then perform formatting of the media using Operation >Format
Media (page 88) in the setup menu.
Notes on security
ˎ SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF
ANY KIND RESULTING FROM A FAILURE TO
IMPLEMENT PROPER SECURITY MEASURES
ON TRANSMISSION DEVICES, UNAVOIDABLE
DATA LEAKS RESULTING FROM TRANSMISSION
SPECIFICATIONS, OR SECURITY PROBLEMS OF
ANY KIND.
ˎ Depending on the operating environment, unauthorized third parties on the network may be able to access the unit. When connecting the unit to the network, be sure to confirm that the network is protected securely.
ˎ Communication content may be unknowingly intercepted by unauthorized third parties in the vicinity of the signals. When using wireless LAN communication, implement security measures properly to protect the communication content.
ˎ From a safety standpoint, when using the unit connected with the network, it is strongly recommended to access the Control window via a Web browser and change the access limitation settings from the factory preset values
Changing the password regularly is also
ˎ recommended.
ˎ Do not browse any other website in the Web browser while making settings or after making settings. Since the login status remains in the
Web browser, close the Web browser when you complete the settings to prevent unauthorized third parties from using the unit or harmful programs from running.
About GPS
The GPS (Global Positioning System) is a system that calculates geographical location from highly accurate US space satellites. This system allows you to pinpoint your exact location on the earth.
The GPS satellites are located in 6 orbits, 20,000 km above the earth. The GPS system consists of 24 or more GPS satellites.
A GPS receiver receives radio signals from the satellites, and calculates the current location of the receiver based on the orbital information (almanac data) and travel time of the signals, etc.
Determining a location is called “triangulating.” A
GPS receiver can determine the location’s latitude and longitude by receiving signals from 3 or more satellites.
ˎ it may take longer to determine the location or the receiver may not be able to determine the location at all, depending on the location and time you use the camcorder.
ˎ “GPS” is a system for determining geographic location by triangulating radio signals from
GPS satellites. Avoid using the camcorder in places where radio signals are blocked or reflected, such as a shadowy place surrounded by buildings or trees, etc. Use the camcorder in open sky environments.
ˎ You may not be able to record location information at locations or in situations where radio signals from the GPS satellites do not reach the camcorder as follows.
– In tunnels, indoors or under the shade of buildings.
– Between tall buildings or at narrow streets surrounded by buildings.
– In underground locations, locations surrounded by dense trees, under an elevated bridge, or in locations where magnetic fields are generated, such as near high voltage cables.
– Near devices that generate radio signals of the same frequency band as the camcorder: near 1.5 GHz band mobile telephones, etc.
ˎ If you upload and share the images which are recorded when the setting “GPS” is ”On,” the record location may be exposed on the internet even if you do not intend to do so. If you do not want to record location information, select “Off”
On triangulating errors
ˎ If you move to another location right after setting “GPS” to “On” in the menu, it may take a longer time for the camcorder to start triangulating, compared to when you stay in the same place.
ˎ Error caused by the position of GPS satellites
The camcorder automatically triangulates your current location when the camcorder receives radio signals from 3 or more GPS satellites.
The triangulating error allowed by the GPS satellites is about 10 m (33 feet). Depending on the environment of the location, the triangulating error can be greater. In this case, your actual location may not match the location on the map based on the GPS information.
Meanwhile, the GPS satellites are controlled by the United States Department of Defense, and the degree of accuracy may be changed intentionally.
ˎ Error during the triangulating process
The camcorder acquires location information periodically during triangulating.
On the restriction of use of GPS
Use GPS in accordance with the regulations of the situation, the countries/regions of use.
On the geographic coordinate system
The “WGS-84” geographic coordinate system is used.
000
11. Appendix
Specifications
General
Mass Approx. 3.6 kg (7 lb 15 oz) (body only)
Dimensions (Unit: mm (inch), excluding protrusions, body only)
1)
332 (13 1/8)
1) The values for dimensions are approximate.
Power requirements
12 V (11 V to 17.0 V) DC
Power consumption
Approx. 22 W (body only, when recording in XAVC, with LCD monitor on)
Approx. 24 W (CBK-VF02 viewfinder, manual lens, microphone, when recording in XAVC, with LCD monitor on)
[Notes]
ˎ Do not connect video lights with power consumption of
50 W or greater.
ˎ When using a battery, do not allow the total power consumption of connected peripherals to exceed 40 W.
ˎ When using the AC-DN10, do not allow the total power consumption of connected peripherals to exceed 50 W.
ˎ When using the AC-DN2B, do not allow the total power consumption of connected peripherals to exceed 85 W.
ˎ Connect only devices with current consumption of 1.8 A or lower to the DC OUT connector.
Operating temperature
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Storage temperature
–20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F)
File system exFAT, UDF
Continuous operating time
Approx. 200 minutes (using BP-L80S)
Recording format (video)
XAVC Intra
XAVC-I mode: CBG, 223 Mbps (max),
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
XAVC Long
XAVC-L 50 mode: VBR, 50 Mbps (max),
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
XAVC-L 35 mode: VBR, 35 Mbps (max),
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
XAVC-L 25 mode: VBR, 25 Mbps (max),
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
MPEG-2 Long GOP
MPEG HD422 mode: CBR, 50 Mbps,
MPEG-2 422P@HL
MPEG HD420 HQ mode: VBR, 35 Mbps
DVCAM
(max), MPEG-2 MP@HL
MPEG IMX
CBR, 50 Mbps
Proxy
CBR, 25 Mbps
AVC/H.264 Main Profile 4:2:0 Long GOP
1280×720/9 Mbps, 6 Mbps
640×360/3 Mbps,
480×270/1 Mbps, 500 Kbps (VBR)
Recording format (audio)
XAVC Intra
LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel
XAVC Long
LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel
MPEG-2 Long GOP
MPEG HD422 mode: LPCM 24-bit,
48 kHz, 4-channel
MPEG HD420 HQ mode: LPCM 16-bit,
48 kHz, 4-channel
MPEG IMX
LPCM 16/24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel
DVCAM
Proxy
LPCM 16-bit, 48 kHz, 2-channel
AAC-LC, 128 Kbps, 2-channel
Recording/playback time
XAVC Intra
XAVC-I mode
Approx. 30 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
XAVC Long
XAVC-L 50 mode
Approx. 120 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
XAVC-L 35 mode
Approx. 170 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
XAVC-L 25 mode
Approx. 220 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
MPEG-2 Long GOP
MPEG HD422 mode
Approx. 120 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
MPEG HD420 HQ mode
Approx. 180 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
MPEG IMX
Approx. 120 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
DVCAM
Approx. 220 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
[Note]
The recording and playback times are for a continuous recording as a single clip. The actual times may be shorter, depending on the number of clips recorded.
Recording frame rate
XAVC Intra
XAVC-I mode
1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 23.98P, 25P
1280×720/59.94P, 50P
XAVC Long
XAVC-L 50 mode
1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 23.98P, 25P
1280×720/59.94P, 50P
XAVC-L 35 mode
1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 23.98P, 25P
XAVC-L 25 mode
1920×1080/59.94i, 50i
MPEG-2 Long GOP
MPEG HD422 mode
1920×1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 23.98P,
25P
1280×720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 23.98P,
25P
MPEG HD420 HQ mode
1920×1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 23.98P,
25P
1440×1080/59.94i, 50i
1280×720/59.94P, 50P
MPEG IMX
720×486/59.94i
720×576/50i
DVCAM
720×480/59.94i
720×576/50i
Proxy
Main line 1920×1080: 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
Main line 1280×720: 59.94P, 50P,
29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
Input/Output Section
Inputs
GENLOCK IN:
BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms,
TC IN: unbalanced
BNC type, 0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 kilohms
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2:
XLR type, 3-pin, female
000
11. Appendix: Specifications
LINE / AES/EBU / MIC / MIC+48V switchable
LINE: +4, 0, –3 dBu
AES/EBU: AES3 compliant
MIC: –70 dBu to –30 dBu
MIC IN: XLR type, 5-pin, female, –70 dBu to
–30 dBu
WRR:
SDI IN:
D-sub 15-pin
Analog CH1: –40 dBu
Digital CH1/CH2: –40 dBFS
SMPTE ST292-1/259 standard compliant
4-channel audio
Outputs
VIDEO OUT:
BNC type, SD analog composite/HD-Y switchable
SDI OUT 1/2:
BNC type, 0.8 Vp-p, unbalanced (3G
HD/1.5G HD/SD switchable)
SMPTE ST424/425 Level-A/B,
ST292-1/259 standard compliant
4-channel audio
AUDIO OUT:
XLR type, 5-pin, male, +4/0/–3 dBu
(balanced)
TC OUT: BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
EARPHONE (stereo, minijack):
–11 dBu (reference level output,
HDMI: maximum monitor volume,
16-ohm load)
Type A, 19-pin
Other
DC IN: XLR type, 4-pin, male, 11 V to 17 V DC
DC OUT: Round type 4-pin, 11 V to 17 V DC,
LENS:
1.8 A maximum rated current
12-pin, lens power source (11 V to 17 V
DC, 1.0 A maximum rated current)
REMOTE: 8-pin
LIGHT: 2-pin
USB: 4-pin (type A) (2), 4-pin (type B)
VF: Rectangular type 26-pin, round type
20-pin
Network connector:
RJ45 type, 100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3u),
10BASE-T (IEEE 802.3)
Camera Section
Imaging element
2/3-inch type, “Exmor” Full HD CMOS image sensor
Type
1920 (H) × 1080 (V)
3-chip RGB
Optical system
F1.4 prism system
ND filters
1: Clear
2: 1/4ND
3: 1/16ND
4: 1/64ND
Sensitivity F12 (system frequency: 59.94i)
(2000 lx, 89.9% reflectance, 3200K)
Minimum illumination
0.013 lx (F1.4, +42 dB, 16-frame accumulation)
Image S/N ratio
62 dB (Noise Suppression On)
Horizontal resolution
1000 TVL (TV lines) or higher
Black level 3 ±1% (Black set to [±0] in the setup menu)
Shutter speed
59.94i/P, 50i/P: 1/60 to 1/2000 sec.
29.97P: 1/40 to 1/2000 sec.
25P: 1/33 to 1/2000 sec.
Slow shutter
23.94P: 1/32 to 1/2000 sec.
2 to 8, 16 frames
Dynamic range
600%
Smear –135 dB
Audio Section
Sampling frequency
48 kHz
Quantization
16/24-bit
Headroom
20 dB (factory default) (20, 18, 16,
12 dB), EBUL
Frequency response
20 Hz to 20 kHz (±3 dB or less)
Dynamic range
90 dB (typical)
Distortion 0.08% or lower (–40 dBu input level)
Built-in speaker
Monaural, 300 mW output
Display Section
LCD monitor
Screen size
8.8 cm (3.5 inch) diagonal
Aspect ratio
16:9
Number of pixels
960 (H) × 540 (V)
Media Section
SxS card slots
Form factor: Express Card/34
Number of slots: 2
Connector: PCMCIA Express Card compliant
Write rate: 50 Mbps or higher
Read rate: 50 Mbps or higher
SD card slots
Proxy (1), Utility (1)
Lens Section (PXW-X400KC)
Lens mount
Focal length
Sony 2/3-inch bayonet mount
8.2 mm to 164 mm
Zoom Manual
Zoom factor
20
Maximum aperture ratio
1:1.9
Iris Auto/Manual switchable
F1.9 to F16 and C (Close)
Focus range
Auto/Manual switchable
Range
900 mm to ∞ (macro OFF)
10 mm to ∞ (macro ON, wide angle)
Filter diameter
M82 mm, 0.75 mm pitch
Macro ON/OFF selectable
Lens Section (PXW-X400KF)
Lens mount
Focal length
Sony 2/3-inch bayonet mount
8 mm to 128 mm
(35 mm equivalent: 31.5 mm to
Zoom
503 mm)
Power/Manual switchable
Zoom factor
16
Maximum aperture ratio
1:1.9
000
11. Appendix: Specifications
Iris Auto/Manual switchable
Focus range
F1.9 to F16 and C (Close)
Auto/Manual switchable
Range
800 mm to ∞ (macro OFF)
50 mm to ∞ (macro ON, wide angle)
732 mm to ∞ (macro ON, telephoto)
Filter diameter
Macro
M82 mm, 0.75 mm pitch
ON/OFF selectable
Supplied Accessories
Shoulder belt (1)
Cold shoe kit (1)
Lens mount cap
USB wireless LAN module (IFU-WLM3)
Protective cap (1)
Guard (1)
Before Using This Unit (1)
Operating Instructions (CD-ROM) (1)
Lens (supplied with PXW-X400KC) (1)
Autofocus lens (supplied with PXW-X400KF) (1)
Flange focal length (flange back) adjustment chart (1)
Stereo microphone (supplied with PXW-X400KC/
PXW-X400KF) (1)
Viewfinder (supplied with PXW-X400KC/PXW-
X400KF) (1)
Stereo microphone windscreen (supplied with
PXW-X400KC/PXW-X400KF) (1)
Related Equipment
Power supply and related equipment
AC adaptor
AC-DN10/DN2B
Battery pack
BP-L80S/FLX75
Battery charger
BC-L70/L90/L70A
Lens, viewfinder and related equipment
Lens 2/3-inch bayonet mount lens only
Viewfinder
HDVF-20A/200/L750/EL20/EL30
Viewfinder rotation bracket
BKW-401
Equipment for remote control
Remote control unit
RM-B170
RCP-1000/1500/1530
RCP-1001/1501
[Note]
Command network unit (CNU) is not supported.
HD camera adaptor
CA-FB70/TX70
[Note]
If SDI OUT2 is used when the CA-FB70 is attached, use an
L-shaped adaptor.
Media adaptor
MEAD-SD02 (for SDXC cards)
XQD ExpressCard adaptor
QDA-EX1 (for XQD memory cards)
Recording media
SxS memory cards
SxS PRO+ series
SxS PRO series
SxS-1 series
Audio equipment
Microphone
ECM-678/674/673/680S
Microphone holder
CAC-12
Digital wireless receiver
DWR-S02D
UHF synthesized tuner unit
WRR-855S/860C/861/862
URX-S03D
Other peripheral devices
Tripod attachment
VCT-14/U14
Video light
UC-D200A (Nippon Video System -
NIPROS)
Pad
Ultralight (Anton Bauer)
CBK-SP01 soft-type shoulder pad
Wireless LAN adaptor
CBK-WA02
Network adaptor kit
CBK-NA1
Products for maintenance, ease of use/handling
Attachment bracket
A-2092-367-
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Notes
ˎ Always make a test recording, and verify that it was recorded successfully.
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES
OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT
ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR
ITS RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE
SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE
SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
ˎ Always verify that the unit is operating properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR
REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS
OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE
TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER DURING THE
WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF
THE WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON
WHATSOEVER.
ˎ SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CLAIMS OF
ANY KIND MADE BY USERS OF THIS UNIT OR
ˎ
MADE BY THIRD PARTIES.
ˎ SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS,
REPAIR, OR REPRODUCTION OF ANY DATA
RECORDED ON THE INTERNAL STORAGE
SYSTEM, RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR
ˎ
STORAGE SYSTEMS.
ˎ SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE
TERMINATION OR DISCONTINUATION OF ANY
SERVICES RELATED TO THIS UNIT THAT MAY
RESULT DUE TO CIRCUMSTANCES OF ANY
KIND.
000
11. Appendix: Specifications
Software Downloads
When the unit is used with a PC connection, download any device drivers, plug-ins, and application software you require from the following websites.
Sony Professional products website:
U.S.A. http://pro.sony.com
Canada http://www.sonybiz.ca
Latin America http://sonypro-latin.com
Europe http://www.pro.sony.eu/pro
Middle East, Africa http://sony-psmea.com
Russia http://sony.ru/pro/
Brazil http://sonypro.com.br
Australia http://pro.sony.com.au
New Zealand http://pro.sony.co.nz
Japan http://www.sonybsc.com
Asia Pacific http://pro.sony-asia.com
Korea http://bp.sony.co.kr
China http://pro.sony.com.cn
India http://pro.sony.co.in
Sony Creative Software, software download page: http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/download/ software_for_sony_equipment
Chart of Peripheral Devices and Accessories
ECM-
680S/678/674/673
Microphone
CAC-12
Microphone holder
CBK-VF02
Viewfinder
HDVF-20A/200/L750/EL20/EL30
Viewfinder
PXW-X400
a)
RM-B170
RCP-1000/1500/1530
RCP-1001/1501
Remote Control Unit
VCT-14
Tripod attachment
HD monitor/SD monitor
WRR-855S/862/861, URX-S03D
UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
DWR-S02D Digital Wireless Receiver
SxS memory cards
SBS-32G1B, SBP-64C/SBS-64G1B,
SBP-128C/SBS-128G1B
MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor
QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adaptor
CA-FB70 HD Camera Adaptor
CA-TX70 HD Camera Adaptor
BP-L80S/FLX75
Battery Pack
BC-L70/L70A
Battery Charger
BC-L90
Battery Charger
MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio
License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4
VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A
CONSUMER FOR
(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE
MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD (“MPEG-4 VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED
FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL,
INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND
LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA,
LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
MPEG LA is offering licenses for (i) manufacturing/ sales of any storage media storing MPEG-4 Visual video information (ii) distribution/broadcasting of
MPEG-4 Visual video information in any manner
(such as online video distribution service, internet broadcasting, TV broadcasting). Other usage of this product may be required to obtain license from
MPEGLA. Please contact MPEG LA for any further information. MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206, http:// www.mpegla.com
AC-DN10/DN2B
AC Adaptor a) The carrying case is large enough to hold the camcorder with lens and microphone mounted. However, remove them if they protrude more than 25 cm (9 7/8 inches) from the front of the main unit.
000
11. Appendix: Specifications
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT:
BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE CONTAINED IN THE
CAMCORDER, PLEASE READ THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”) CAREFULLY. BY USING THE SOFTWARE
YOU ARE ACCEPTING THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO
NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA, YOU MAY NOT USE
THE SOFTWARE.
This EULA is a legal agreement between you and Sony
Corporation (“SONY”). This EULA governs your rights and obligations regarding the software of SONY and/or its third party licensors (including SONY’s affiliates) and their respective affiliates (collectively, the “THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS”) contained in the camcorder, together with any updates/ upgrades provided by SONY, any printed, on-line or other electronic documentation for such software, and any data files created by operation of such software (collectively, the “SOFTWARE”).
Notwithstanding the foregoing, any software in the
SOFTWARE having a separate end user license agreement
(including, but not limited to, GNU General Public license and Lesser/Library General Public License) shall be covered by such applicable separate end user license agreement in lieu of the terms of this EULA to the extent required by such separate end user license agreement (“EXCLUDED
SOFTWARE”).
SOFTWARE LICENSE
The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. The SOFTWARE is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and international treaties.
COPYRIGHT
All right and title in and to the SOFTWARE (including, but not limited to, any images, photographs, animation, video, audio, music, text and “applets” incorporated into the SOFTWARE) is owned by SONY or one or more of the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS.
GRANT OF LICENSE
SONY grants you a limited license to use the SOFTWARE solely in connection with the camcorder and only for your individual use. SONY and the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS expressly reserve all rights, title and interest (including, but not limited to, all intellectual property rights) in and to the
SOFTWARE that this EULA does not specifically grant to you.
REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
You may not copy, publish, adapt, redistribute, attempt to derive source code, modify, reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble any of the SOFTWARE, whether in whole or in part, or create any derivative works from or of the SOFTWARE unless such derivative works are intentionally facilitated by the SOFTWARE. You may not modify or tamper with any digital rights management functionality of the SOFTWARE.
You may not bypass, modify, defeat or circumvent any of the functions or protections of the SOFTWARE or any mechanisms operatively linked to the SOFTWARE. You may not separate any individual component of the SOFTWARE for use on more than one camcorder unless expressly authorized to do so by SONY. You may not remove, alter, cover or deface any trademarks or notices on the SOFTWARE.
You may not share, distribute, rent, lease, sublicense, assign, transfer or sell the SOFTWARE. The software, network services or other products other than SOFTWARE upon which the SOFTWARE’S performance depends might be interrupted or discontinued at the discretion of the suppliers
(software suppliers, service suppliers, or SONY). SONY and such suppliers do not warrant that the SOFTWARE, network services, contents or other products will continue to be available, or will operate without interruption or modification.
EXCLUDED SOFTWARE AND OPEN SOURCE
COMPONENTS
Notwithstanding the foregoing limited license grant, you acknowledge that the SOFTWARE may include EXCLUDED
SOFTWARE. Certain EXCLUDED SOFTWARE may be covered by open source software licenses (“Open Source
Components”), which means any software licenses approved as open source licenses by the Open Source Initiative or any substantially similar licenses, including but not limited to any license that, as a condition of distribution of the software licensed under such license, requires that the distributor make the software available in source code format. If and to the extent disclosure is required, please visit www.sony.
com/linux or other SONY-designated web site for a list of applicable OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS included in the
SOFTWARE from time to time, and the applicable terms and conditions governing its use. Such terms and conditions may be changed by the applicable third party at any time without liability to you. To the extent required by the licenses covering EXCLUDED SOFTWARE, the terms of such licenses will apply in lieu of the terms of this EULA. To the extent the terms of the licenses applicable to EXCLUDED SOFTWARE prohibit any of the restrictions in this EULA with respect to such EXCLUDED SOFTWARE, such restrictions will not apply to such EXCLUDED SOFTWARE. To the extent the terms of the licenses applicable to Open Source Components require
SONY to make an offer to provide source code in connection with the SOFTWARE, such offer is hereby made.
USE OF SOFTWARE WITH COPYRIGHTED
MATERIALS
The SOFTWARE may be capable of being used by you to view, store, process and/or use content created by you and/ or third parties. Such content may be protected by copyright, other intellectual property laws, and/or agreements. You agree to use the SOFTWARE only in compliance with all such laws and agreements that apply to such content. You acknowledge and agree that SONY may take appropriate measures to protect the copyright of content stored, processed or used by the SOFTWARE. Such measures include, but are not limited to, counting the frequency of your backup and restoration through certain SOFTWARE features, refusal to accept your request to enable restoration of data, and termination of this EULA in the event of your illegitimate use of the SOFTWARE.
CONTENT SERVICE
PLEASE ALSO NOTE THAT THE SOFTWARE MAY BE DESIGNED
TO BE USED WITH CONTENT AVAILABLE THROUGH ONE OR
MORE CONTENT SERVICES (“CONTENT SERVICE”). USE OF
THE SERVICE AND THAT CONTENT IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS
OF SERVICE OF THAT CONTENT SERVICE. IF YOU DECLINE
TO ACCEPT THOSE TERMS, YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
WILL BE LIMITED. You acknowledge and agree that certain content and services available through the SOFTWARE may be provided by third parties over which SONY has no control. USE OF THE CONTENT SERVICE REQUIRES AN
INTERNET CONNECTION. THE CONTENT SERVICE MAY BE
DISCONTINUED AT ANY TIME.
INTERNET CONNECTIVITY AND THIRD PARTY
SERVICES
You acknowledge and agree that access to certain
SOFTWARE features may require an Internet connection for which you are solely responsible. Further, you are solely responsible for payment of any third party fees associated with your Internet connection, including but not limited to Internet service provider or airtime charges. Operation of the SOFTWARE may be limited or restricted depending on the capabilities, bandwidth or technical limitations of your Internet connection and service. The provision, quality and security of such Internet connectivity are the sole responsibility of the third party providing such service.
EXPORT AND OTHER REGULATIONS
You agree to comply with all applicable export and re-export restrictions and regulations of the area or country in which you reside, and not to transfer, or authorize the transfer, of the SOFTWARE to a prohibited country or otherwise in violation of any such restrictions or regulations.
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES
The SOFTWARE is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the SOFTWARE could lead to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage
(“HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES”). SONY, each of the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS, and each of their respective affiliates specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty, duty or condition of fitness for HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.
EXCLUSION OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE
You acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk and that you are responsible for use of the
SOFTWARE. The SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS,” without warranty, duty or condition of any kind.
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRD-
PARTY SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as
“SONY”) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, DUTIES
OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SONY DOES NOT WARRANT OR
MAKE ANY CONDITIONS OR REPRESENTATIONS (A) THAT
THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN ANY OF THE SOFTWARE
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THEY WILL
BE UPDATED, (B) THAT THE OPERATION OF ANY OF THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECT OR ERROR-FREE OR THAT ANY
DEFECTS WILL BE CORRECTED, (C) THAT THE SOFTWARE
WILL NOT DAMAGE ANY OTHER SOFTWARE, HARDWARE
OR DATA, (D) THAT ANY SOFTWARE, NETWORK SERVICES
(INCLUDING THE INTERNET) OR PRODUCTS (OTHER
THAN THE SOFTWARE) UPON WHICH THE SOFTWARE’S
PERFORMANCE DEPENDS WILL CONTINUE TO BE AVAILABLE,
UNINTERRUPTED OR UNMODIFIED, AND (E) REGARDING
THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE
IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR
OTHERWISE.
NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN
BY SONY OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF SONY
SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, DUTY OR CONDITION OR
IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY.
SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME
THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THESE
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
000
11. Appendix: Specifications
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as “SONY”) SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY RELATED
TO THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF
REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE
OR ANY ASSOCIATED HARDWARE, DOWN TIME AND USER’S
TIME, EVEN IF ANY OF THEM HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ANY CASE, EACH AND
ALL OF THEIR AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION
OF THIS EULA SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. SOME JURISDICTIONS
DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
CONSENT TO USE OF NON-PERSONAL
INFORMATION, LOCATION DATA, DATA SECURITY
You acknowledge and agree that SONY and its affiliates, partners and agents may read, collect, transfer, process and store certain information collected from the SOFTWARE, including but not limited to information about (i) the
SOFTWARE and (ii) the software applications, contents and peripheral devices that interact with your camcorder and the
SOFTWARE (“Information”). Information includes, but is not limited to: (1) unique identifiers relating to your camcorder and its components; (2) performance of the camcorder, the
SOFTWARE and their components; (3) configurations of your camcorder, the SOFTWARE and the software applications, contents and peripheral devices that interact with the camcorder and the SOFTWARE; (4) use and frequency of use of the functions of (x) the SOFTWARE, and (y) the software applications, contents and peripheral devices that interact with the SOFTWARE; and (5) location data, as indicated below. SONY and its affiliates, partners and agents may use and disclose Information subject to applicable laws in order to improve its products and services or to provide products or services to you. Such uses include, but are not limited to: (a) administering the functionalities of the SOFTWARE;
(b) to improve, service, update or upgrade the SOFTWARE;
(c) improving, developing and enhancing the current and future products and services of SONY and other parties; (d) to provide you with information about the products and services offered by SONY and other parties; (e) complying with applicable laws or regulations; and (f) to the extent offered, providing you with location-based services of SONY and other parties, as indicated below. In addition, SONY retains the right to use Information to protect itself and third parties from illegal, criminal or harmful conduct.
Certain services available through the SOFTWARE may rely upon location information, including, but not limited to, the geographic location of the camcorder. You acknowledge that for the purpose of providing such services, SONY, the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS or their partners may collect, archive, process and use such location data, and that such services are governed by the privacy policies of SONY or such third party. By using any such services, you agree that you have reviewed the privacy policies applicable to such services and consent to such activities.
SONY, its affiliates, partners and agents will not intentionally use Information to personally identify the owner or user of the SOFTWARE without your knowledge or consent. Any use of Information will be in accordance with the privacy policies of SONY or such third party. Please contact applicable contact address of each area or country for SONY’s current privacy policy.
Please contact applicable third parties for privacy policies relating to personally identifiable and other information you provide when you use or access third party software or services.
Information may be processed, stored or transferred to
SONY, its affiliates or agents which are located in countries outside of your country of residence. Data protection and information privacy laws in certain countries may not offer the same level of protection as your country of residence and you may have fewer legal rights in relation to Information processed and stored in, or transferred to, such countries.
SONY will use reasonable efforts to take appropriate technical and organizational steps to prevent unauthorized access to or disclosure of Information, but does not warrant it will eliminate all risk of misuse of such Information.
AUTOMATIC UPDATE FEATURE
From time to time, SONY or the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS may automatically update or otherwise modify the SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to, for purposes of enhancement of security functions, error correction and improvement of functions, at such time as you interact with SONY’s or third parties’ servers, or otherwise. Such updates or modifications may delete or change the nature of features or other aspects of the SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to, functions you may rely upon. You acknowledge and agree that such activities may occur at SONY’s sole discretion and that SONY may condition continued use of the SOFTWARE upon your complete installation or acceptance of such update or modifications. Any updates/modifications shall be deemed to be, and shall constitute part of, the SOFTWARE for purposes of this EULA. By acceptance of this EULA, you consent to such update/ modification.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT, WAIVER, SEVERABILITY
This EULA and SONY’s privacy policy, each as amended and modified from time to time, together constitute the entire agreement between you and SONY with respect to the
SOFTWARE. The failure of SONY to exercise or enforce any right or provision of this EULA shall not constitute a waiver of such right or provision. If any part of this EULA is held invalid, illegal, or unenforceable, that provision shall be enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to maintain the intent of this EULA, and the other parts will remain in full force and effect.
GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION
The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this EULA.
This EULA shall be governed by the laws of Japan, without regards to conflict of laws provisions. Any dispute arising out of this EULA shall be subject to the exclusive venue of the
Tokyo District Court in Japan, and the parties hereby consent to the venue and jurisdiction of such courts.
EQUITABLE REMEDIES
Notwithstanding anything contained in this EULA to the contrary, you acknowledge and agree that any violation of or non-compliance with this EULA by you will cause irreparable harm to SONY, for which monetary damages would be inadequate, and you consent to SONY obtaining any injunctive or equitable relief that SONY deems necessary or appropriate in such circumstances. SONY may also take any legal and technical remedies to prevent violation of and/or to enforce this EULA, including, but not limited to, immediate termination of your use of the SOFTWARE, if
SONY believes in its sole discretion that you are violating or intend to violate this EULA. These remedies are in addition to any other remedies SONY may have at law, in equity or under contract.
TERMINATION
Without prejudice to any of its other rights, SONY may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with any of its terms.
In case of such termination, you must: (i) cease all use, and destroy any copies, of the SOFTWARE; (ii) comply with the requirements in the section below entitled “Your Account
Responsibilities”.
AMENDMENT
SONY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AMEND ANY OF THE TERMS
OF THIS EULA AT ITS SOLE DISCRETION BY POSTING NOTICE
ON A SONY DESIGNATED WEB SITE, BY EMAIL NOTIFICATION
TO AN EMAIL ADDRESS PROVIDED BY YOU, BY PROVIDING
NOTICE AS PART OF THE PROCESS IN WHICH YOU OBTAIN
UPGRADES/ UPDATES OR BY ANY OTHER LEGALLY
RECOGNIZABLE FORM OF NOTICE. If you do not agree to the amendment, you should promptly contact SONY for instructions. Your continued use of the SOFTWARE after the effective date of any such notice shall be deemed your agreement to be bound by such amendment.
THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES
Each THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER is an express intended thirdparty beneficiary of, and shall have the right to enforce, each provision of this EULA with respect to the SOFTWARE of such party.
Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, you may contact SONY by writing to SONY at applicable contact address of each area or country.
Copyright © 2012 Sony Corporation.
000
11. Appendix: Specifications
Open Software Licenses
On the basis of license contracts between Sony and the software copyright holders, this product uses open software.
To meet the requirements of the software copyright holders, Sony is obligated to inform you of the content of these licenses.
For the content of these licenses, see “License1.
pdf” in the “License” folder of the supplied CD-
ROM.
Trademarks
ˎ Android and Google Chrome are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google, Inc.
ˎ Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/ or other countries.
ˎ Apple, Macintosh, Safari, and iPhone and their logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the US and other countries.
ˎ The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
ˎ Wi-Fi Protected Setup TM the Wi-Fi Alliance.
(WPS) is a trademark of
ˎ All system names and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners. Trademarked items are not indicated by ® or ™ symbols in this document.
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- 1/2-type 3CMOS sensor
- XAVC Intra and XAVC Long recording formats
- Slow and quick motion recording
- Dual recording
- HDMI, SDI, and USB connectivity
- Network functions supported by the camcorder